JP2020000320A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To achieve control considering a degree of advantage of a display result of variable display.SOLUTION: During execution of variable display that is variable display of one identification information from among the first identification information and second identification information and corresponds to a first specific display result (for example, a probability variable jackpot pattern), a display result of variable display of one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, variation display is executed continuously) on the basis of derivation and display of a special display result (for example, a small win jackpot) in variation display of the other identification information. During execution of variation display that is variation display of one identification information and corresponds to a second specific display result (for example, a normal big win pattern), variation display of the one identification information is derived and displayed by a predetermined display result (for example, a losing pattern) (for example, it is forcibly stopped at the losing pattern) on the basis of derivation and display of the special display result in variation display of the other identification information.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-47

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined winning value is given to the player. There is one configured in Further, a variable display means capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value (A so-called pachinko machine).

  The prize value means paying out a prize ball, giving a score, or giving a prize according to a prize of a game ball in a prize area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is likely to win a hit ball, or for a player. This means that a right to be in an advantageous state is generated, or that a condition for paying out prize balls is easily established.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable display of a special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on a game ball winning the starting winning opening. In this case, a "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the state shifts to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is won, the winning prize opening is closed. The number of opening of the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and if the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel, and can be controlled to a special state different from the advantageous state. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes that when the variable display of one variable display game is stopped in the small hit result mode, the variable display of the other variable display game is forcibly disconnected and the game is ended uniformly in the result mode. Have been. Further, it is described that when the variable display of one variable display game is stopped in the small hit result mode, the other variable display game is uniformly stopped.

JP-A-2017-148127 (paragraphs 0899 to 0901) (paragraph 0460, FIG. 42)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, with respect to the variable display stop control when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel, the display of the variable display is performed. Control that considers the degree of advantage of the result could not be realized.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of a variable display result.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( More specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps S122 to S125) and a special display result (for example, Special state control means (for example, microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) different from the advantageous state when the winning symbol is derived and displayed. The specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable change big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). The first specific display result is derived and displayed, the advantage for the player is higher than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the state is controlled to be in a stable state after the big hit game), and the variable display is performed. Executing means for variably displaying one of the first identification information and the second identification information and performing the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result; The display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed based on the derived display of the special display result in the variable display of the information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)). In step 044 IWS 1128 A, S 1128 B, when the answer is Y, the process does not proceed to step 044 IWS 1129 A, S 1129 B, so that the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed. Continuously executed), during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the other identification information is displayed. The variable display of the one identification information is displayed in a predetermined manner based on the derived display of the special display result in the variable display. The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes the steps 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B when the answer is N in Steps 044IWS1128A and S1128B. In this case, the first symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the first symbol or the second symbol. According to such a configuration, control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion that executes step 044 IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, in a specific state (for example, a high-probability state (eg, a high-probability state) which is a state different from the advantageous state and is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low-probability state). Specific state control means (for example, a part for executing step 044 IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) which is controllable by the first specific display. Controlling to a specific state based on the result being derived and displayed (for example, controlling to a probability changing state after the end of the big hit game based on the probability changing big hit), and non-specifying based on the second specific display result being derived and displayed. The state may be controlled (for example, the state may not be changed to the positive change state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed to a specific state.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the state is different from the advantageous state and is more easily controlled to the advantageous state compared to the non-specific state (for example, the low probability state) (for example, , A high-probability state (probable change state)) (for example, a portion that executes step 044 IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), and the specific state control means When a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through a specific area (for example, the V area 044IW104) while being controlled to the advantageous state, the specific state can be controlled (for example, a game control microcontroller). The computer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S220. Is executed), and when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the specific area is played at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. The medium passes (as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit, the open period of the V-region open / close plate 044IW101 is long. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), In a big hit game based on a normal big hit, the opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the variable display execution means may perform either variable display of the first identification information or variable display of the second identification information. Also, the special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS64A and S64B; see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). During the execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information. (For example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes the step 044I When N is determined in S1128A, steps 044IWS1129A and S1130A are executed. See FIG. 10-55 (B).) During the execution of the variable display of the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the second identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer is used). 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 044IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-54 and 10-55 (E).). According to such a configuration, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, a specific state (for example, a state different from the advantageous state, which is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state)) , A high-probability state (probable change state)) (for example, a part that executes step 044 IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), and the variable display execution means When the display is controlled to the specific state, the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is performed while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being performed. Based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the identification information, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a modified example). In step, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS1129A and S1130A when the answer is Y in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B. See FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57), a non-specific state. During the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the other identification information is displayed. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, Specifically, the CPU 103) determines in step 044 IWS 1131A, S1131B Flop 044IWS1129A, not enter S1129B. Figure 10-56, Figure 10-57 see.) May be configured so. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory control process process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of notification when a setting change flag is set at power-on. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a structure of the special variable winning prize ball apparatus in the characteristic part 044IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 044IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decoration symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable prize winning ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable prize winning ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning prize ball device and a special variable prize winning ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory control normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during opening of a big hit. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to change a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory pre-opening process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect mode of a set value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display mode of right-handed notification. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of another special symbol during variable display of one special symbol. 15 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol change process in a first modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a second special symbol variation process in Modification Example 1. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for describing control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of another special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification Example 1. 15 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol change process in Modification 2. 15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification Example 2. It is an explanatory view for explaining control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modified example 2. 15 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol change process in Modification 3. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for describing control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of another special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3. 15 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol change process in Modification 4. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a second special symbol change process in Modification 4.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting and firing device into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there is provided a right-handed indicator 26 for urging a right-handed operation of performing a firing operation aiming at the right of the game area. I have. The right-handed indicator 26 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and is controlled to be turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended is provided. In this example, a first hold display area 5A for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and a second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure An area 5B is provided. Note that a display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right strike notification LED 37 for prompting a right strike operation is provided. Note that the right-turned notification LED 37 is controlled to be turned on by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning port is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting port switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening, so that game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area provided with the first start winning opening. Have been. Thus, the row of nails 19 for preventing the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the operation of firing the game balls aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left hit) The game ball can enter the first starting winning port only when the player has operated the game.

  Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which the first starting winning opening allows game balls to be won only when a left-handed operation is performed due to the provision of the row of nails 19; It is not limited. For example, the first starting winning opening may be provided on the left side of the game area so that a game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when a left-hand operation is performed. The mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided so that the game ball can enter the first starting winning port only when a left hit operation is performed.

  On the right side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided. A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

  Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a special winning opening is provided. The special variable prize ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves a plate-shaped bottom member formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-rear direction to move back and forth. An open state (also referred to as an open state) in which game balls can be won at a large winning opening located below the member, and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which game balls cannot be won. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the big hit game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved rearward from the closed state moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is performed to open the large winning opening that is a winning area.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 7 are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 for forming a special winning port for small hits, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port. As shown in the figure, a special variable winning ball device 17 is disposed on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable prize ball device 17 and the variable prize ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and move the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, a special winning port and a second starting winning port located below the bottom member are opened (also referred to as an open state) in which game balls can be won, and closed (in a closed state) in which game balls cannot be won. To say). The special variable prize ball device 17 moves the bottom member in a small hitting game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. From the closed state, which is moved forward, the bottom member is moved backward, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is a winning area. In addition, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward when the symbol hits the normal symbol display 20 and the symbol is derived and displayed, Opening control for opening the second start winning opening, which is a winning area, is executed.

  In this example, the special variable prize ball device 7, the special variable prize ball device 17, and the variable prize ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed such that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game balls falling on the special variable winning ball device 7 If the special variable prize ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable prize ball device 7 from upper left to lower right, and falls on the variable prize ball device 6B thereunder.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from upper right to lower left, so that the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are variable. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 17 and the variable prize ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other. When the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the gaming ball wins the second starting winning opening, and the special variable winning ball is dropped. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom surface member of the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning opening, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls as it is toward the out opening.

  Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restriction pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom member. I have. In the present example, the special variable prize ball device 7, the special variable prize ball device 17, and the variable prize ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow to flow is delayed more than when there is no regulating piece.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable prize ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable prize ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to be gently inclined from upper right to lower left, and when the bottom member is not receded and is in a closed state, the special variable winning ball device is changed from the variable winning ball device 6B. In this sense, the variable prize ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable prize ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that.

  A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the large winning opening is opened, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the game sphere to the special winning opening and obtain the prize ball, and therefore, for the player, You will be at a disadvantage.

  In the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, although the number of prize balls is smaller than when the game ball has won the large winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters) another prize port, such as the first start prize port 1 or the second start prize port. Therefore, when the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning port is closed, it is not possible to pass (enter) the game ball to the special winning port to obtain a prize ball, so that the player cannot obtain the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

  In addition, a second starting port switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball winning in the second starting winning port is provided in the second starting winning port. When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, and during a big hit game or a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area by a firing operation (a so-called right strike operation). )I do.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower right and left sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called an ordinary game.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, there is provided a general symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose display indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol is changed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, so that the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game state shifts to the big hit game state based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, so that the passing gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays both roles of the normal starting area and the operating area.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect frame LED 9 is provided around the gaming area. .

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (storage). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) for paying out prize balls when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous that the player performs a shooting operation (a so-called left-handing operation) aiming at the left side of the game area. When a player performs a left-hand operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a game ball enters a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, a first special symbol display is performed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (the start winning prize has occurred. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the first special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on a big hit type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes “big hit”. . If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained. Note that, even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be "small hit".

  After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit gaming state is controlled as a favorable state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is selected from the timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing of the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaching a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until reaching a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a probable change state (high probability state), a KT state, a high base state, etc.) are prepared. The big hit type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  After the big hitting game state is ended, the state may be controlled to the certainty changing state, the KT state, or the high base state according to the big hit type.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a “big hit” is likely to occur.

  In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to cause a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, so that less prize balls can be obtained than in the big hitting game state, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the high base state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed (hour saving state), and the general figure game " For example, by increasing the probability that the game ball becomes higher than the normal state, control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly, the second special symbol) is improved, and is a state advantageous to the player.

  The probable change state, the KT state, and the high base state continue until one of the end conditions, such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state, is satisfied first. I do. A condition in which the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number of times cut probability change or the like).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a probable change state, a KT state, a high base state, and the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a predetermined reset process is not performed after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed). It is in a state where it is done.

  When the big hit game ends and the game state is controlled to the certainty change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-hand operation by rotating the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game on the ordinary symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol will be "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the determined ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening becomes open).

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In the second special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol is different depending on the big hit type described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes “big hit”, If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is displayed.

  After the display result in the second special map game becomes "big hit", the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state for the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. As in the case of the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for “small hit”.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes “small hit” (however, “small hit” occurs. If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed).

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that a game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, the state may be controlled to be a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and raising the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the point of the frame LED 9 is performed. It may be performed by, for example, turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5, as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the two special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described later. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) to be a "big hit" (also referred to as a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation) according to the effect mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”) are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state ends, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probable variable symbol, a promotion effect that eventually becomes “probable variable jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decoration symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decoration symbol (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left," "middle," and "right." In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it is “small hit” Alternatively, a common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). When the display result is “losing”, after the decorative pattern variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the big hit combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display result. The fixed decoration symbol may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-described variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit middle effect for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), and jackpot Gaming state, small hitting gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, and data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal).

  The switch circuit 110 includes various switches (gate switch 21, starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B)) for game ball detection, and count switches (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) (For example, a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on), and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, and the solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory and a door for a special winning opening door. The signal is transmitted to a solenoid 82 and a solenoid 83 for a special winning opening.

  The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, directs an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) in accordance with the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, the number of storages held, a game state), and a command for specifying an error occurrence and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of restoration of power interruption).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal designating the sound to be output) in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-turn notification LED 37. It supplies the LED 13 to the board 13 and supplies the LED control board 14 with an LED signal (a signal for designating the ON / OFF state of the LED). In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 includes various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signals, and outputs sounds designated by the sound designation signals from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The LED control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. The LED control board 14 drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal and specifies the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-turn notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on / off of the LED.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the LED (supply of a sound designation signal or LED signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). And an output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, an operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is performed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the process at the time of power supply stop, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the status of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; No), an initialization process (Step S8) is performed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (Step S4). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, and thus the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the currently running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

  When receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, big hit information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big hits) and start information (start information) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). The execution of the first special figure game and management of suspension and the like are realized by the CPU 103 executing the first special symbol process processing every time the timer is interrupted (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes a second special symbol process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process every time the timer is interrupted, the execution of the second special symbol game and management of suspension are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel.

  Subsequent to the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes an accessory control process process (step S25C). The CPU 103 executes the accessory control process at each timer interrupt, thereby realizing control of a big hit game state, a small hit game state, control of a game state, and the like (details will be described later).

  Subsequent to the accessory control process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “per day” is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine. Processing is also performed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to also output a test signal (right-handed test signal) capable of specifying a period during which a right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the KT state during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right strike test signal during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

  In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start win in the first start winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a winning start occurs in the first winning opening, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored in a first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information. Is done. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first number of stored memories, a transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating the occurrence of a start winning prize, the first number of stored memories, and a determination result such as a pre-reading determination to the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

  After executing the first start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special map process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process process (steps S110A to S113A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the first special symbol normal process, the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” or “big hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result. The jackpot type in the case is determined (prior determination) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. . Thereafter, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In the first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are determined by using a random value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a prior determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The processing for determining one of them is included. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

  The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (reach or not, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Is designated (variable display pattern, etc.), and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In the first special symbol variation process, a process for setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is measured. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the first special symbol change processing ends. I do.

  In this example, since the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the first special symbol change process (step S112A) and the first special symbol change process is performed. When the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, a small hit may be made in the fluctuating display of the second special symbol and the small hit game may be controlled. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hitting game is being performed (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hitting release). It is determined whether or not the value is equivalent to the processing to the small hit end processing). If the small hitting game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol change processing. In this way, the value of the first special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop processing unless the small hit game is being performed. By performing such control, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to be. In addition, such a control is not limited to, for example, during a small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (the timer is stopped). The update may be interrupted.

  Further, for example, a small hit ending period as a small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on a game state. For example, in the normal state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be interrupted, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes longer, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol are changed. If the difference is large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stoppage of the swing of the decorative design, and the effect gives the player an uncomfortable feeling. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the small hit ending period be shorter than the KT state (the first KT state and the second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

  Further, in the case of the above-described configuration, for example, in the first KT state, the game ball is substantially difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is performed, so that the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. May be configured. On the other hand, in the second KT state, in the small hit control, the game ball is easy to win, and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be configured to be longer than in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, in the first KT state, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds, whereas in the second KT state, the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds.

  Furthermore, the length of the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pre-processing period may be varied depending on the game state, as in the small hit ending period.

  The first special symbol stop process of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In the first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the change of the first special symbol and stops and displays (derives) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the first special symbol. The processing for setting is included. If the display result is "big hit", a setting process for starting a big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, a process for starting a small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the control is set to the probable change state, the KT state, or the high base state, and the end of the number cut is established. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop processing ends.

  The processing executed in the second special symbol processing (step S25B) is the same as the processing executed in the first special symbol processing (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored as the hold information in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102.

  In the present example, since the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol change processing to change the change of the second special symbol. During the display, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol and the small hit game may be controlled. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not a small hitting game is being performed (specifically, the value of the first special map process flag is set before the small hitting release). It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the processing from the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hitting game is being performed, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol change processing. In this way, the value of the second special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop processing unless the small hit game is being performed. By performing such control, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to be. In addition, for example, during the small hitting game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (interruption of the timer). The update may be interrupted.

  Note that the small hit control based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol may be configured such that the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period varies depending on the game state.

  FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S25C illustrated in FIG. 4 as the accessory control processing. In this accessory control process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the accessory control process (steps S120 to S128), transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The accessory control normal processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “0”. In this character accessory control normal processing, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is performed. If the setting for starting the big hit game is performed, the processing for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “1”.

  The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the passing of the game ball to the passage gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “2”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit game state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of "big hit" or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit number of rounds executed are set, for example, according to the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “3”, and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. The processing during opening of the jackpot is based on the processing of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23 based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. The processing includes determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “4”. Then, the processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "4". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round for opening the special winning opening has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of a big hit game state when the upper limit number of times has been reached. And the like to make settings for ending the process. When the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “3”. The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such setting is performed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the special winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. The processing during opening of the small jackpot includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “8”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a staging operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is performed has elapsed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (Step S73; No), the process of Step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. However, if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt is generated. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read out can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 122 For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, the effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative luminous body such as a frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and a driving of the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11.

  Subsequent to the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random number used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to the step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a control effect command at the time of a start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like specifying the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to an instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (light decoration signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the frame LED 9 and decorative LED by output, is executed. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to such an operation, a fixed decorative symbol which is a display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “3”, and the rendering process during variable display ends.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In the big hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the big hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine may be used.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating “-” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a detachable recording medium, but may be a computer device or the like in advance. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the expression of comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “different”) means that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on a back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L and 8R and a frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these devices are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 9C, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a function of setting random numbers used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Of the predetermined symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and controlling the illumination of the ordinary symbol display 20 to turn on / off / coloring and controlling the variable display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 21TM029 displays various kinds of winning information related to winning. It also has a display function. Note that a display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 receives various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 for transmission to the terminal 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

  The main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is sealed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material as shown in FIG. 9-3, and a display monitor 21TM029 is provided at the center of the main board 11. (For example, 7 segments), and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is disposed on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened. This is a front view when viewing, and is different from the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) is provided with each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry area"). ), And the various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning ratio based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm various prize information such as a connection ratio and a winning ratio after being set in the game hall. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed.

  Further, the power supply board is sealed in a board case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and in a lower right portion on the back of the power supply board, set values such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later are changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 functioning as a setting switch and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade operates the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, etc. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation are facilitated.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk having a predetermined key can operate. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, among the store clerks of the amusement shop, only the store clerk having the key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key. The lock switch 21TM051 can execute the switching operation and execute an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation). A possible switch may be used.

  The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. In other words, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. The lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which a key can be inserted and removed only in an OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. Can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided for discharging the gaming balls that have won each winning opening and the gaming balls that have entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and a decoration. An LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the application LED is included.

  FIG. 9B is a block diagram illustrating components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9B, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having the payout control CPU 21TM371, the RAM and the ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The detection signals from the ball out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2, and the front face of the game board 2 can be opened and closed. And a door frame opening sensor 21TM300 having a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a to be covered by the sensor, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is input. The 21TM370 can distinguish and recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that a game ball is clogged, that is, to detect a so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball-out switch 21TM187 indicates a ball-out state, or the detection signal from the full-state switch 21TM048 indicates a full-state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the low level with respect to the firing board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball firing from the hitting ball firing device. Outputs a full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The filling-up signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of an AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full signal.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signals and received ACK signals) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, one second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 When the prize ball request signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the signal transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the reception to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, specific data is added to the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, so that the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can transmit and receive the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. And specific data is exchanged between them. For example, when a prize occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of a prize ball request signal, and sets the prize for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 completes the prize ball payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to a game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. Further, when a predetermined error (error such as lending, filling up the ball, running out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is made. The received reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits, via the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the prize ball payout number and a ball lending number signal indicating the lending ball number to a terminal board (an external terminal board for a frame and an external terminal board for a board). Is output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 9B.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to prize ball LED21TM053 and ball out LED21TM054 via output port 21TM372b. The detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release an error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable lamp, a link direction indicator, a card insertion lamp, and a card insertion slot. To the interface board (relay board) 21TM066, a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending enable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected.

  From the interface board 21TM066, the card unit 21TM050 is supplied with a ball rental switch signal indicating that the ball rental switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated in response to the operation of the player. . In addition, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. When the power is turned on, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connection state / non-connection state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give a predetermined number of loaned balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, under the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in a power supply line of 24V AC for the card unit 21TM050 provided in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) changes according to a set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to the set value, the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is changed. . The set value is made up of six stages of 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIGS. 9A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is a target of variable display, and the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each case where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/300) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9E, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/235) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9F, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/220) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. Note that “probability” shown in FIGS. 9A to 9F indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit by using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9A to 9F. Separately provided, the jackpot determination is performed using a common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special figure designation buffer. Is also good.

  In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. May be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion effect)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which the “sunny” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen, and FIG. 9-5 (2) shows an example in which the “cloudy” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

  The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the big hitting game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, so that the ending effect mode can be determined based on the stored setting value. For example, based on an effect control command transmitted when the big hit game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the character together with a character (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the big hit game state has ended. It is possible to display an ending image of a mode (fine mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value that is set.

  The table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4) shows that the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3, 4”, and “5, 6”. When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the “sunny” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), the mode is determined to be the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), and FIG. When the determination is made in the “rain” mode shown in 5 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

  When the set value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, effect control CPU 120 suggests a setting of the “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined that the effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is executed at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) is to be executed at the ratio (for example, 40%). When the set value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a high rate (for example, 50%), and It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%). Further, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in what mode the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The entertainment of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in the manner in which the ending effect performed when the big hit gaming state ends is performed, and in particular, the ending effect is performed in the “sunny” mode. You expect to be done.

(Process at power-on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). In this process, a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, any one of 0 to 5 or not. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values as set values stored in the set value storage area, and six levels of set values having different big hit probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. The set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

  Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before being installed in the gaming arcade), the set value storage area stores the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the setting value storage area is broken, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the mode is changed to a setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON or not (step S21TM4040).

  If clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is determined that the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is to be executed. When the value is 1, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be executed. It indicates that it was done. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear is executed after the processing relating to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

  The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power recovery is 0 (the initial value is not set). The notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described later, after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It may be performed.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  In addition, a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected and the open state of the glass door frame 3a have been detected from the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the game control is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 By the input of the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4070). . Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the flow shifts to the processing in step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, setting values can be checked and changed. When the mode shifts to the setting checking mode, setting values can be checked.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not interrupted during the setting change ( The setting values are changed and / or changed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070). Alternatively, confirmation is possible. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is set. The process shifts to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to change the setting value to a state in which the setting value cannot be changed but the setting value can be checked (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (2) 2) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070, the CPU 103 can confirm the set value (setting confirmation). Mode). Further, in addition to the conditions (1) and (2), (3) the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES). On the condition that the setting value has been changed, as described later, it is possible to shift to a state where the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. Can not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 or there is some illegal There is a possibility that confirmation or change of the set value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to confirm or change the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting change mode is not controlled.

  In this embodiment, when one of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state as the condition (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. The control is possible, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. Even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode May not be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the flow shifts to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described later without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. If it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the mode is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and a step S21TM4760 described later is performed. (Transmission of setting command).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. In checking the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the set value storage area does not store a regular value (0 to 5) (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 The process moves to step S21TM4120. When the setting change flag is checked (step S21TM4030) and it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

  Here, even if regular values (0 to 5) are stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the flow shifts to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Mode. Also, if the data in the backup RAM area is checked (step S21TM4010) and the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). If the setting change mode has been controlled when the previous power failure occurred, the setting change mode is controlled based on the satisfaction of the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later). Will be.

  In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM4130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON or not (step S21TM4140).

  If clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. In the closed state, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned on in step S21TM4130 (NO in step S21TM4130), and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not turned on in step S21TM4140 (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 determines that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. Setting value error To send over command to effect control for the CPU120.

  When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies the image display device 5 that the set value may be abnormal. For example, a message that "the setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, effect control CPU 120 causes image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn off power switch 21TM055) and then shift to the setting change mode when turning on the power again (when turning on power switch 21TM055). To perform an operation for changing the set value (determining the set value). For example, a message is displayed indicating that "Please turn on the power after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode". Note that the same notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until power is turned off.

  In this loop processing, the CPU 103 performs a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4200), and then displays the character “E” on the display monitor 21TM029, so that “the set value is not a regular value (0 to 5)”. It is determined that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that is, all of the determinations in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are determined to be YES) and the transition to the setting change mode has not been established despite the possibility of the possibility ". A notification is issued (step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from an output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit provided for the gaming machines, a call lamp device, or the like). Is done.

  During the loop processing, the character “E” is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. The provision of the weight of 4 ms prevents excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. The security signal is continuously output during the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer or the like, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a regular value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the security signal being input. ), It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling the mode to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode).

  The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply stops (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and if YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be performed in this state. Before proceeding to a normal game process (for example, a game control timer interrupt process including a prize ball process and a special symbol process process), the set value in the set value storage area needs to be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode.

  In this embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, (3) The three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the CPU 103 can change the setting value ( (Change setting mode).

  If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process. Therefore, if the determination in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, or step S21TM4140 is NO, the process proceeds to the above-described loop processing (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).

  If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), it is not possible to shift to the normal game process. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the pachinko gaming machine 1 once and turn on the power again. No. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

  In the present embodiment, if the setting change in-progress flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value change is not permitted, but the setting value can be checked (setting check mode). (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4070).

  However, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. (YES in step S21TM4130), the setting check mode is not controlled. Even if the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), The game is stopped (the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process of FIG. 9C, the CPU 103 checks whether the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the flow shifts to step S21TM4530. If the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 stores “0” in the set value storage area as the regular value with the lowest probability of big hit. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, control goes to a step S21TM4530.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a power-off process after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power-off processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure or the like is input. Immediately before the operation becomes impossible due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In the process at the time of power supply stop, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the status of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off process, the check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

  This allows the power supply to be turned on when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the repetitive processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the repetitive processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and S21TM4650 is performed). If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be appropriately performed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (Step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. The clerk of the amusement arcade usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as it is, the clerk of the amusement arcade actually May be incorrectly recognized. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting check mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the mode has been controlled to the setting check mode. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the flow shifts to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 changes the set value. In step S21TM4580, a setting change in-progress flag indicating that there is a possibility that there is a possibility of the setting being changed is set. Since the area for storing the value of the setting change flag is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power supply is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is 1 (set state) at the next power on.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating control to the setting change mode (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting switch information indicating whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and checks whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

  Each time a store clerk at the game hall operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of being controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the last time when the power is turned off) is 3 If so, the setting values stored in the setting value storage area are updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 is accordingly updated. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

  Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the set value cannot be updated (step S21TM4620) correspond to a setting check mode in which the set value can be checked or the set value cannot be changed. During the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is repeatedly executed.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (determined YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (determined NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is kept 0).

  In addition, the display of the current set value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) can be executed. This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be confirmed and changed.

  In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). The determination is made and the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting confirmation mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and sets the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. For this reason, when transmitting the setting change mode command, the CPU 103 sets a setting change mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change in progress flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and the processing in step S21TM4540 and thereafter is repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, control in the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, control in the setting change mode is continued.

  If lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting the predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the process proceeds to the normal game process thereafter. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt processing is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or whether the setting confirmation mode has ended.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 9A, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting check mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting check are performed. In response to the end of any control in the mode, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is set (step S21TM4710).

  Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed irrespective of whether the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the mode is set to the setting confirmation mode. (Without) a common process. In step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also performed regardless of whether the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. No) is performed as a common process. As described above, the output control of the security signal is simplified by sharing the output start control and the output end control of the security signal between the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Thus, the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting check mode, and the output of the security signal is output in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting check mode. , It is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the end of the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled is set to a common value (1000 ms). Set to timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode and the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode, the external device side can use any mode. It will be difficult to determine whether or not it has been controlled.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is temporarily set in step S21TM4710. After setting the timer value to 1000 ms, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM, the security signal timer value is reset to 30000 ms (overwritten). I have. That is, after the security signal remaining output period is once set to 1 sec, the security signal remaining output period is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

  When the above-described signal output control is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is, as shown in FIG. 1 sec has elapsed since the start of the setting change mode, and 30 sec has passed since the end of the setting change mode when the setting change mode has been controlled.

  Specifically, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interruption is permitted. In the process (for example, information output process), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the mode is controlled to the setting change mode (when the RAM is cleared, When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30,000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interruption is permitted. The output of the security signal is continued until. When the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, or when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at a timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing. ) To 0 ms, and the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

  As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec between when the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished and when the control in the setting change mode is finished, and the control is switched to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the control of the setting change mode ends. With such a configuration, the output period of the security signal can be made different between the case where control is performed in the setting confirmation mode and the case where control is performed in the setting change mode, while sharing the output control of the security signal.

  As a result, in the external device, it is also possible to grasp whether the initialization process has been executed and the setting has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode, or the initialization process has been executed and the setting has been controlled to the setting change mode. . For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the mode has been set to the setting confirmation mode without performing the initialization process. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the setting process has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

  Note that a security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in a backup area of the RAM 102 (however, an area cleared by the initialization processing) based on the detection of the abnormality by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that a security signal is output for four minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set at the time of power restoration.

  Here, if the control is switched to the setting confirmation mode at the time of power restoration, since the RAM clear is not executed, the value of the abnormality detection flag is set without being initialized in the signal output processing, It is possible to output the security signal continuously for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to prevent the output period of the security signal from being limited to a period until one second elapses from the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, if the setting is changed to the setting change mode when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so that the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (the power failure occurs). At this time, it is unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected.) As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds elapse (according to execution of RAM clear). Period).

  In the example shown in step S21TM4710 in FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. The value of the security signal timer to be set may be at least as long as the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

  After the processing of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, when the setting change in progress flag is cleared and the power is cut off thereafter, it is determined that the setting change in progress flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). In addition, even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed, and the setting command is transmitted.

  Here, the player usually recognizes the range of the set value to be 1 to 6, and the effect control CPU 120 uses the value specified by the set command (the value stored in the set value storage area) as it is in the image. If the setting value is displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the setting value (1 to 6), and An effect that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

  The present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the CPU 103 sets the value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command, and sets the effect control. May be transmitted to the CPU 120. As a result, the range of the setting value specified by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. The effect control CPU 120 displays the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command on the image display device 5 as it is, or executes an effect indicating the setting values (1 to 6) specified by the setting command. By doing so, the set value can be reported or suggested appropriately. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 to perform an addition process on the set value specified by the received setting command, so that the control load on the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command, the setting value can be suggested. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

  Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770) means that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a regular value (step S21TM4010). It is determined that the answer is YES in S21TM4020, the power is not interrupted during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). That is, it is only necessary to execute the process at the time of power-off recovery without RAM clear.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and executes a game control timer interrupt process (special (Including pattern process processing). That is, when the control is not performed in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or when the control in the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is 0 or not. Without executing the clearing, the backup command is transmitted as the command at the time of the power-off recovery, and the process shifts to the normal game process.

  In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the restoration from the power interruption based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply is performed (the RAM is not cleared). That). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9 have been restored from the power interruption based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. (That the RAM is not cleared) can be notified.

  On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute RAM clear. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the process at the time of turning on the power with the RAM clear.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as a value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. After the interruption is permitted, the processing may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt processing (including the special symbol processing).

  As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is set. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by notifying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). The RAM clear processing initializes predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102.

  The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in the RAM clear processing is as follows. (A) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. This means that the value has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, whether the value of the set value storage area has been set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or during the setting change mode This is because a normal value is stored by the operation (Step S21TM4610 and Step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the set value storage area.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, and a special symbol process flag, for example. Initial values are set.

  After executing Step S21TM1430 and Step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1450). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization processing is performed based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM clear is performed without performing the recovery from the power failure based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply). ). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect such as the game state is initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 (data at the time of power supply stop). On the basis of the above, it is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without the recovery from the power interruption.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. If the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer without executing step S21TM4710. ), The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, and the value of the security signal timer is set to one second set in step S21TM4710. Remains.

  By setting the value of the security signal timer in this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, a security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). Thereafter, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by permitting the interrupt, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

  Then, CPU 103 executes a setting process of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. The communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes a display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and an initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to a normal game process in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating an initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to perform. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one cycle (the normal value for the random number for the symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal for controlling the other microcomputer, or the gaming machine control process. When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at the time of power-off recovery. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the condition is that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (according to the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). T), the process may be shifted to the process at the time of restoration from power failure.

  In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power-on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in a closed state (game machine frame). 3 or the state of the glass door frame 3a), and may shift to a process at the time of power-on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

  As described above, the store clerk at the game hall or the like sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize a game state or the like (to execute RAM clear). By turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state and the like can be controlled. Can be initialized (that is, the determination in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 is NO and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk at the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. I have.

  As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting was changed to the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the setting value that is to be determined on the game arcade side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game processing and stops the game (step S21). (S21TM4200 to loop processing of step S21TM4220), and outputs a security signal in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (the game control timer interrupt process is executed), and to prevent the power from being turned on when the power is turned on. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode has been controlled when a disconnection occurs.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 sets the condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). When all of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are not YES), a set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and the display monitor is displayed in the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character “E” on 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM4210).

  In the example illustrated in FIGS. 9 to 10, the character “E” is displayed on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D included in the display monitor 21TM029, thereby causing the store clerk of the amusement arcade to generate an abnormality (in the setting change mode). (It is possible that a power failure has occurred in a controlled state). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays a message “Please turn on the power after turning off the power and shift to the setting change mode” on the image display device 5 to display the game arcade. Operation to change the set value by turning off the power (power switch 21TM055 is turned off) once and then turning on the power again (when power switch 21TM055 is turned on). (To confirm the set value).

  In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is open (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (step S21TM4140). If YES), the control is switched to the setting change mode. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (Step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Turn off the power and then turn on the power again"). Please shift to the setting change mode. ").

  Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 is controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, a message such as “Setting change mode is in progress” or a message “Change setting value by performing setting change operation” can be displayed on image display device 5. Thereby, the store clerk at the game hall can grasp that the setting change mode is being controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area is obtained. By changing the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing the set value to the set value, the set value can be determined and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, when the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any one of the conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled in the setting change mode. . As a result, an error display (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 is executed, and a message is displayed on the effect control board 12 ("Power is turned on again after power is turned off"). To change to the setting change mode. ").

  As described above, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). And then shift to the setting change mode.) It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk at the game hall grasps that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power and control the mode to the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is once turned off, the power is turned on again by operating such that all of the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed to the expected set value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be determined and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  As described above, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be properly notified when the power is restored.

  Here, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied at the time of power restoration (a), an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed. Since the mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without being displayed, unnecessary error display can be avoided, and the setting value can be appropriately changed.

  On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied at the time of power restoration (b), the power cannot be switched to the setting change mode at the time of power restoration, even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since the state is in the state, the game is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029). Will be done. This makes it possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value has not been determined, thereby realizing appropriate game control.

  When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transition to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and when the transition condition (i) is satisfied. ) To (iii), a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal depending on whether any of the conditions is not satisfied.

  For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode (or the condition for shifting is satisfied). Is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 receives this command, and displays a message that “the setting value may be abnormal” and a message that “the setting is automatically changed to the setting change mode”. It is preferable to display the information on the device 5. On the other hand, when the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command of step S21TM4190 as described above.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process is started, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated. In response to the operation (change from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting changeover switch (clear switch) In response to the operation of the 21TM052 (change from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

  The effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on receiving the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Despite the absence, it is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify that fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “lock switch operation detected.” Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character “Operation of setting changeover switch has been detected” is executed. As a result, the store clerk at the game hall clearly understands that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting check mode, and It can be confirmed whether or not the operation is performed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game process, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated, The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the setting is performed, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

  The present invention is not limited to such a mode, and as shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not the condition is satisfied.

  In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, if the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. In this case (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The part that is controlled in the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled in the game stop state (the processing corresponding to the loop processing in step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the processing shown in FIG. 9-6. Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

  Even in such a case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is interrupted during the change.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. The state is controlled and the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition (iii) that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (determined NO in step S21TM4570). When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting values in the setting value storage area can be changed (YES in step S21TM4030). Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied, the control is forcibly controlled to the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the power is cut off during the control in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. Is automatically controlled to the setting change mode irrespective of whether or not is established, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

  Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is performed even if the condition that (ii) lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains OFF, the set value stored in the set value storage area is changed. (Steps S21TM4610 to S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

  As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is that the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (determining YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, the store clerk who has performed the setting value change operation, once the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, in order to finalize the set value and terminate the setting change mode, temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

  As described above, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) and when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is set. On the other hand, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode. The game is appropriately shifted to the normal game process.

  Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification that prompts the user to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 may be issued. good. For example, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a set value abnormality error command (step S21TM4190 described above). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and switch it off after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing while the setting change flag is set. Therefore, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the gaming machine side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is not ended, it becomes impossible to cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the mode to the setting change mode, perform the setting change operation, and take a measure for fixing the set value.

(Set value storage control in case of power failure during setting value change)
Next, the control for storing the set value when the power is cut off during the change of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value itself stored in the set value storage area is changed.

  First, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by performing a setting value changing operation during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12 (1).

  As shown in the order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in the order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is set to the read set value. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  Next, as shown in the order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the operation of the first setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 performed. Is changed to “1”, and “2”, which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in the order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “1” based on the operation of the second setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 performed. Is changed to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  Next, as shown in the order 5, it is assumed that in the setting change mode, the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for terminating the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value storage area stores the setting value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. When the power is turned off, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in the order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power was cut off during the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in the order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is set to the read set value. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  When the power is turned on in the order 6, since the setting change flag is set, even when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared) when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 is applied. Even when the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the mode is automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

  As described above, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is turned off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without terminating the setting change mode), the power is restored when the power is restored. In this state, the set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been set may be set. In this case, the store clerk of the game arcade ends the setting change mode without performing the operation of changing the set value again. It is only necessary to shift the gaming machine to the normal game processing, so that workability can be improved.

  Next, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by performing a setting value changing operation during the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG.

  Orders 1 to 4 are the same as those in the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in the order 5, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state in the setting change mode, the setting change mode ends. Thus, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the determined set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  After that, as shown in the order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in the order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in the order 8, when the setting change mode is started, the set value “2” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is set to the read set value. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled to the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control of the setting change mode ends. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value changed in accordance with the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is used. , The effective set value (the set value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area when controlled in the setting change mode, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is controlled in the setting change mode. When the 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value of the setting value storage area, and the operation of terminating the setting change mode (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (by overwriting) based on the fact that the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state is performed, and the setting value is determined. May be. In this case, the setting value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

  With such a configuration, even when the setting is changed to the setting change mode upon power-on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. If the power is turned off without completing the operation of ending the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is This means that no change has been made since the power was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area when the power is last turned on is continuously held. Therefore, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is last turned on. It becomes a value according to the set value that was set.

  As described above, it is possible to appropriately set a set value in the case where power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

  In the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode described in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability depending on the setting value is provided. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this. Although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to gaming machines whose jackpot probability is 1/300.

  The following invention is disclosed in the feature section 21TM.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. In the case of a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when changing the set value or the like. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a control state related to setting to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value;
A specific signal output unit (a game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode control; ,
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (a value of the security signal timer) relating to a period during which the specific signal is output,
The setting means can set a common predetermined value in the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and in the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (set 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). With the end, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode. Do)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
The game machine of means O1,
Initialization means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes a game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting change mode),
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting unit can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (If the RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465)
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continue to output security signal until 30 seconds elapse)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value both when the control in the setting change mode ends and when the control in the setting confirmation mode ends. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so that the setting process by the setting unit is common and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. The period can be set.

The game machine of means O3 is
A game machine of means O1 or means O2,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped in the setting change mode without performing a specific operation (detecting that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) to end the setting change mode. In the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration). In this case, the game is stopped and the specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode not being satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to O3,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of the game,
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for terminating the setting change mode (without detecting an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). The specific information storage means for storing the specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration). In this case, it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (transmit a set value abnormal error command in step S21TM4190, and display a display monitor in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter “E” on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control unit issues a notification prompting an operation for changing a setting value (“the power supply is turned on again after the power is turned off, and the setting change mode is set. Please migrate! "Message is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the clerk at the amusement arcade, and to urge an operation for changing the set value.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a set value. The invention according to the means P1 to P4 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The gaming machine of the means P1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration). In this case, there is further provided an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied). .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means P2 is
The gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch (setting Changeover switch) (21TM052 is in ON state) based on the setting change mode.
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration). In this case, it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the establishment of the setting change condition (when power is turned on, all of the steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are performed). (Based on the determination of YES, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the mode is controlled to the setting change mode without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided to appropriately set the setting value. You can prompt a change.

The game machine of means P3 is
A game machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification and set the game to a stop state (when the power-on condition is not satisfied, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (any of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). If the answer is NO in step S21TM4200, the processing shifts to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of the game,
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
Said specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification on the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (transmit a set value error error command in step S21TM4190 and display the error in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control unit issues a notification prompting an operation for changing a setting value (“the power supply is turned on again after the power is turned off, and the setting change mode is set. Please migrate! "Message is displayed)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine to the clerk at the amusement arcade, and to urge an operation for changing the set value.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when power supply is stopped when changing a set value. The invention according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. Is to do.

The gaming machine of the means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (six levels of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in a backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (when the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when the power is restored). When the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting changeover switch) Automatically switches to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is ON is satisfied.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode involving the initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
The game machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, based on the fact that the RAM clear flag has been set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150, and The game control microcomputer 100) for executing the clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
The gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means, based on that the setting change condition is satisfied, When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is open and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. And the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the end of the setting change mode due to the ON state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the satisfaction of the condition), and the specific information is If the setting change condition is satisfied, control is performed in the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030). ), Automatically switches to the setting change mode regardless of whether the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied or not)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied, based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A game machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so that the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends). Is executed), that is, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied)), the control can be performed to the setting change mode. Specific operation (in step S21TM4680, it was confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 was turned off) It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the)
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when the setting change mode is controlled (sets the setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (the setting change-in-progress flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 at which the control of the setting change mode ends) based on
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether the transition operation has been performed Control is performed in the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not. The setting change mode is automatically controlled) and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in step S21TM4680). Make
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the condition for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) can be executed;
The setting value stored in the setting value storage unit is changed based on a change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation while being controlled to the setting change mode (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off). Exits the configuration change mode based on
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation while the setting change mode is being controlled, the setting value storage unit changes the setting value in the setting change mode by the change operation. The set value after the setting is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored. Will be changed, so even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the set value after being changed by the change operation will be retained.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the setting value changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the setting value storage unit, and the setting value corresponding to the setting value is stored. Since the control is performed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) can be executed;
The setting change mode control means stores the change operation when the setting change mode is being controlled and the setting change mode (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode) in the setting value storage area. Only the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area), and changing the set value stored in the set value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area). To set as a valid set value and exit the setting change mode),
The setting value storage means is configured to execute the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation in the case of being controlled to the setting change mode. The setting value before the setting is stored (even if the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). Is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled by the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 044IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 044IW will be described. First, a gaming state in the present feature part 044IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the present feature part 044IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In the characteristic portion 044IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). Control, low probability and controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and high probability and controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state). , High probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

  In the first KT state of the KT states, as will be described later, although the small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be opened, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, Is extremely rare (for example, about one ball every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, the state is controlled so that small hits are likely to occur, and the state is controlled to be in the high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state among the KT states, as described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, the state is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to a low base state, so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be short.

  The KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the probability that the variable prize ball device 6B will be in the open state at the time of ordinary drawing is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the ratio determined to be a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the ratio determined to be a small hit is increased (but will be described later). Therefore, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to fluctuate, and the game state is advantageous to the player.

  The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which the KT state is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning prize ball device 6B will be in the open state as a normal figure is the same as the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol fluctuates. By configuring the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of times of variation with respect to a certain time in the KT state is higher than that in the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

  Further, the characteristic portion 044IW is configured so that the time required from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to reach the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and by a group of nails forming a flow path of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be opened based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from the passage of the gate 41 to the control of the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing the passing gate 41. When the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state when one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required until the variable prize ball is opened. Of game balls can be directly won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the present feature unit 044IW. As shown in FIG. 10A, the special variable prize ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 044IW108 formed as a bottom surface of a flow path through which a game ball flows down. By moving the bottom member 044IW108 backward and rearward from the closed state where it is moved forward and forward, the large winning opening serving as a winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

  In the characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10A, the game ball that has won the large winning opening is further guided to the guidance route 044IW100 provided to the right of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guidance route 044IW100 is further branched into two routes 044IW102 and 103, and the game ball guided to the guidance route 044IW100 is guided to the left route 0444IW102 or the right route 044IW103. When guided to the left route 044IW102, the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 0444IW106. When guided to the right path 044IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 044IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, a V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left-side route 044IW102, and when the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is in an open state, the game guided to the guidance route 044IW100. The sphere can enter the left route 044IW102 and enter the V region 044IW104. When the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guidance route 0444IW100 enters the right route 0444IW103, and is discharged from the discharge region 044IW105 to the back side of the game region.

  The V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 044IW109.

  In addition, in the present characteristic portion 044IW, when the big hit game is controlled, the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, and after the big hit game ends, on condition that the game ball is detected by the V region switch 044IW106. It is controlled to a probable change state.

  Note that the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 044IW106 and the game ball number detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107 during one round matches the game ball number detected by the first count switch 23. Should be. Therefore, the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 044IW106 and the game ball number detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107 during one round does not match the game ball number detected by the first count switch 23. In such a case, a configuration may be made in which a special winning opening entrance / exit mismatch error is determined and an error is notified. In this case, it takes some time before the specially-selected winning ball device 7 reaches the V region 044IW104 or the discharge region 044IW105 immediately before the winning ball device 7 is closed, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed. If the number of game balls does not match before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the above, it may be configured to determine that there is a special winning opening entrance discharge mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10B is a configuration diagram illustrating various control boards and the like in the present feature unit 044IW. In the characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), a count switch (first count switch). 23 and the detection signals from the V area switch 044IW106 and the ejection area switch 044IW107 in addition to the detection signals from the second count switch 24)), and transmit the signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, in the characteristic part 044IW, the solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the door for the special winning opening door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, the signal is transmitted to the solenoid 044IW109 for the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Among these, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. FIG. 10-4 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. It is to be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in six stages, but may be configured so that the setting can be changed in two to five stages or the configuration can be changed in seven or more stages.

  First, the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, in the non-probability state (low-probability state), the case of the set value “1” is the lowest as the jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “247/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), the winning probability of the jackpot in the whole is 10 times greater in the probability-change state (high-probability state) than in the non-probability-change state (low-probability state). In the case of the value “1”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the non-probable state (low probability State) or the probability change state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536". That is, in this example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probable change state and the probable change state. In this way, even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. May be made different for the set values “1” to “6” so that the number of determination values for each set value matches.

  Next, the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the case where the change display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, in the non-probability state (low-probability state), the case of the setting value “1” is the lowest as the jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “247/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the winning probability of the big hit is 10 times as large as the probability change state (high probability state) as compared to the non-probability change state (low probability state). In the case of the value “1”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the case of the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. High, making it the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the non-probable change state (low probability) State) or the probability change state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant at "62986/65536". That is, in this example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probable change state and the probable change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), compared with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3), the small hit is achieved. The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the second special symbol change display is the small hit when performing the first special symbol change display). More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even if the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability becomes constant, as shown in FIGS. May be made different for the set values “1” to “6” so that the number of determination values for each set value matches.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination values corresponding to the outliers are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 10). As shown in FIG. 3C and FIG. 10D, there is no set value at which the outlier probability becomes 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the loss differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” is present). , The outlier probability is different).

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and may be configured so that, for example, there is a case where the outlier probability is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the outlier). For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (highest probability of big hit), the outlier probability may be 0 and the determination value corresponding to the outlier may not be included.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and may be configured so that, for example, there is a case where the small hit probability becomes 0 (that is, a judgment value which does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, in the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 10C), the small hit probability is uniformly set to 0, and the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

  In FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10 (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A) and (B), the small hit probability is the same in the probable state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the probability of miss is different, the probability of big hit in the probable state (high-probability state) is higher than that in the non-probability state (low-probability state). It may be reduced and the outlier probability may be matched. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values, for example, “1” and “2”, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. Thereby, in a gaming machine having substantially less than six possible setting stages or a gaming machine having no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a gaming machine of a type having a six-stage setting change function and a hardware / software configuration Can be shared, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIGS. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination tables stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The big hit type determination table is configured such that, when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit is “2R normal big hit”, “2R probable big hit”, “ This is a table that is referred to for determining one of “6R normal big hit”, “6R certain variable hit”, and “10R certain variable big hit”.

  As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in the characteristic portion 044IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined as “10R probability variable jackpot” with a probability of 9%, determined as “6R probability variable jackpot” with a probability of 56%, and determined as “6R normal jackpot” with a probability of 35%. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in the characteristic portion 044IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Is determined as "10R probability variable hit" with a probability of 10%, determined as "6R probability variable hit" with a probability of 50%, determined as "2R probability variable hit" with a probability of 5%, and determined as "2R probability variable hit" with a probability of 35% 2R normal big hit ".

  The “10R probability changing big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the 16-bit big hit game state and is shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends. The “6R probability change big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of six rounds and the state is shifted to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends. Further, the “2R probability changing big hit” is a big hit that controls the game to a big hit game state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the big hit game state ends.

  The “6R normal big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of six rounds and shifts to the low probability state after the big hit game state ends. The “2R normal big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and is controlled to a low probability state after the big hit gaming state ends.

  In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the “10R probability change big hit”, “6R probability change big hit”, and “6R normal big hit”, a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the big hit game. Until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, the special winning opening is controlled to be in an open state, and a maximum of 10 special winning openings can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probable big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings in the large winning opening that can win in each round is about two to three.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 044IW, when the big hit game is ended, the game is controlled to one of the first KT state, the second KT state, and the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The manner of transition of the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIGS. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams illustrating a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The small hit type determination table displays the small hit types as "small hit A" and "small hit B" based on the random number for hit type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. ”Or“ small hit C ”.

  As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), in the characteristic portion 044IW, regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6”, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, "Small hit A" is determined with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), in the characteristic portion 044IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”. Is determined as “small hit B” with a probability of 70% and “small hit C” with a probability of 30%.

  In this example, as described later, in the case of “small hit A”, the special winning opening is opened for only a very short 0.2 second during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-12), and the small hit game is performed. It is hardly expected that game balls will enter the special winning opening. In the case of the "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hitting game (see FIG. 10-13), and the game ball is won to the special winning opening during the small hitting game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hitting game (see FIG. 10-14), and the game ball is won to the special winning opening during the small hitting game. You can expect the most.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 10-7 to FIG. 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decoration symbol used in the characteristic portion 044IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is data of the second byte of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and the decoration symbol, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decoration symbol 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, a variation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

  When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, when the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state) is set, the variation pattern for the first special symbol for the non-KT state shown in FIG. A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, any one of the first variable patterns # 01 to # 06 is determined.

  In the case of performing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), FIG. 10-7 (B) The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, the first special symbol is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state) is set, the variation pattern for the second non-KT special second symbol shown in FIG. A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in the non-KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined to be a loss, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the small hit is determined, the second fluctuation pattern # 02 is determined, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

  In the characteristic portion 044IW, even when the non-KT state is in effect, if the change display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, a situation arises in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning game balls to the special winning opening. Would. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely increased and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is increased. Is reduced to reduce the frequency of occurrence of small hits, thereby preventing a situation where a small hit is aimed at acquiring a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic portion 044IW, the “frequency of occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, the small hits per unit time Is higher than the normal state.

  In the characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is changed even if a big hit occurs. Is relatively long, such as 5 minutes, to prevent the act of aiming for a prize ball by unreasonably winning a special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, the digestion of the first reserved memory does not need to be longer than in the case of a small hit, so that the fluctuation time is shorter than in the case of a small hit. I have.

  When the second special symbol is fluctuated and displayed, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended. The change pattern table is selected according to the number of changes after the change. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the change display of the second special symbol is executed as the first change of the low probability / first KT state, any of the second change patterns # 04 to # 06 is performed. Is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is a loss, the second variation pattern # 04 of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds. It is determined. If it is determined that the small change is the first change of the low probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 05 (second start winning opening opening) which is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. Fluctuation pattern for preparation). In the characteristic portion 044IW, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, although the frequency of small hits increases, the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B is lengthened to actually increase the special variable prize. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately formed. If the device 17 is controlled to the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 044IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning prize ball device 6B or the special variable prize winning ball device 17 is changed before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to an open state after a sufficient time elapses until all of the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a special winning opening. This prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. When it is determined that the first variation of the low probability / first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for two minutes.

  In the case of executing the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuation after ending the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state, FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 49th variation shown in E) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 07 to # 13 is displayed. Determined to be one. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10E, when it is determined that the probability is low as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds # 07 or a second variation pattern # 08 of a shortened variation with a variation time as short as 1 second in some cases. On the other hand, if it is determined to be out of the low probability / first KT state as the 2nd to 49th variation, the second variation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. When the small probability is determined as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 10 of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds or the variation time of 1 second is even shorter. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small probability is determined as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second change patterns # 08 and # 11 are where one or more second hold storages are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the user is present. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. If it is determined to be a big hit as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

  In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit which triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended, the fluctuation display of the 50th change (that is, the final change in the low probability / first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16 is performed. Is determined.

  In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, a character display such as “during chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5, for example. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined to be a loss or a small hit as the 50th change of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as “CHANCE TIME END !!” is displayed on the image display device 5. Is determined as the second variation pattern # 14 or the second variation pattern # 15 accompanied by the end display for performing In addition, as shown in FIG. 10F, when it is determined that the big hit is the 50th change of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as “CHANCE TIME END !!” is displayed on the image display device 5. After the end display to be performed, the second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined resurrection display is determined.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-7, in the characteristic portion 044IW, when a large hit occurs in the variation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 having a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. Is configured to determine. This is a case in which a big hit has occurred immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set as a long change time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol is configured to be forcibly released, the forced off occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player loses a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profits. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a short change time, so that the game mode shifts to the big hit game state based on the change of the first special symbol before forcible loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

  It should be noted that, unlike the characteristic portion 044IW, even when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the first special symbol, the change of the second special symbol is not forcibly removed (for example, the first special symbol is not changed). If the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol big hit symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is forcibly released), and if the gaming machine is of the KT state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit has occurred immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. If the change time of the big hit is set to the same short change time as the loss, the player will You will not be able to receive any profits from small hits. Therefore, if the change time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is set to a long change time (for example, one minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time for which the small hit can be generated at least a plurality of times is provided. (For example, one minute).

  When executing the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation after ending the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit which triggered the high probability / first KT state. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is to be performed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21 is performed. Is determined.

  In addition, similarly to the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), even when it is determined to be out of the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation time is determined. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 17 having a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds is determined. On the other hand, even when the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is determined to be the first variation, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Also, when the small change is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern # 19) for preparing the second starting winning opening may be determined. On the other hand, when the small fluctuation is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10G, when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is a big hit, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

  In addition, if the variation display after the second variation is performed after the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit which triggered the high probability / first KT state is performed, the variation shown in FIG. The probability / first KT and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the second variation and thereafter are selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the change display of the second special symbol is executed as the second change or later of the high probability / first KT state, any of the second change patterns # 22 to # 28 is performed. Is determined.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when it is determined to be out of order from the second change of the high probability / first KT state as shown in FIG. There is a case where the second variation pattern # 22 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern # 23 of the shortened variation whose variation time is as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of position after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. When it is determined to be a small hit as the second or higher change of the high probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 25 of the shortened change having a short change time of 5 seconds or the further shortened change time of 1 second. The second variation pattern # 26 of the variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a small hit as the second or later variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold storage is not stored, and the second change patterns # 23 and # 26 include one or more second hold storages. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the user is present. Thus, the configuration is such that the use of the reserved storage is expedited and the operation rate is increased. If it is determined to be a big hit as the second or higher variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if the state is the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. A selection is made to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, the variation is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. .

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when it is determined to be out of order in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 29 of the shortened variation as short as 1.5 seconds. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 30 is a normal variation having a variation time of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of place in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 31 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 of the shortened variation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the variation time is usually 5 seconds. The second variation pattern # 33 of the variation may be determined. Further, when it is determined to be a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

  More specifically, when the variation pattern is determined, it depends on which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be displayed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers for determining variation patterns, and which variation pattern is determined. FIG. 10-10 is a diagram for determining the variation pattern in the case where the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for the high probability / second KT for the second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits.

  As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the characteristic portion 044IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display that causes a small hit is performed, , Irrespective of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the second variation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second variation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in the present example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the variation pattern of the 1.5-second variation is selected.

  In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, the variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIG. 10-7 to FIG. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening change of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening change of 1.5 seconds is performed with a high probability in the case of the second KT state. Is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration may be such that a shortened change of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the low probability state, and a shortened change of 1.5 seconds is executed in the case of the high probability state.

  Next, an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, using FIG. 10-11 (1), a special variable prize ball in the case of being controlled to a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, and a 2R probability variable jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “probability variable jackpot”). The opening pattern of the device 7 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when the game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

  In addition, in the big hit game based on the probability change big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the winning of the second game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 044IW109 is driven, and The region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the V region 044IW104. When a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. When the variable winning prize ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

  When a game ball enters the V-region 044IW104 and is detected by the V-region switch 044IW106 within a predetermined validity period, the game state is controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the predetermined detection valid period starts at the timing when the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is turned on. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses after the closed state is controlled again.

  Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), opening of the special variable prize ball device 7 in the case of being controlled to the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal big hit”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled. Then, when the game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

  Also, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first game ball winning the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 044IW109 is driven, and The area opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to be in an open state for a very short period (in this example, 0.02 seconds). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the predetermined detection effective period is after a very short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101. This is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the open period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the V region 044IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and is easily controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the V region 044IW104 substantially during a predetermined detection validity period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to be in a positively changed state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in the present example, in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 at a higher rate during the big hit game than the big hit game based on the normal big hit.

  Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening patterns of the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 in the KT state. 10-12 show the opening patterns of the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 in the case of the small hit A. 10-13 show the opening patterns of the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable winning prize ball device 17 in the case of the small hit B. FIG. 10-14 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning prize ball device 6B and the special variable winning prize ball device 17 when the small hit C occurs. FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 10-12 (2). 10 to 14 (2) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state.

  First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). As shown in FIG. 10-12 (1) to FIG. 10-14 (1), when a game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 The fluctuation display of the symbol is executed, and when it is determined that the symbol is a regular symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 20. When it is determined that the symbol is lost, the symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 20. Is done. In the characteristic part 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missing symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening is opened. After the elapse of the pre-processing time of 0.1 second, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

  If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined to be a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit symbol is A, the special variable prize ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). In the case of the small hit B, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable prize ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can enter the special prize port (however, in the case of the small hit A, Since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for a very short period of 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins a special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning prize ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning prize ball device 6B can be opened. After a lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time 0.2 seconds of the next ordinary symbol, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, is there. Accordingly, in the characteristic portion 044IW, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 044IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Normally, since the time required for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 and not reach the variable prize ball device 6B in a state where the symbol is not changed is changed, the variable prize ball device 6B is already opened. When controlled to the state, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed are more likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). As shown in FIG. 10-12 (2) to FIG. 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display device 20 The fluctuation display of the symbol is executed, and if it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20. If it is determined that the symbol is lost, the deviated symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 20. Is done. In the characteristic part 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missing symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), after the symbol fixing time 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening is opened. After a lapse of the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and a game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

  If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is determined to be a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit symbol is A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). In the case of the small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of the small hit C, As shown in -14 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short, 0.2 seconds. In the characteristic portion 044IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closed period) after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol fluctuation time 1.0 second + symbol fixed time 0 seconds). .2 seconds + the time before the second start winning opening opening process is 2.6 seconds). Accordingly, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. As compared with the first KT state, the game ball easily enters the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable prize ball device 17 opens for only a very short period of 0.2 seconds, so that even in the second KT state, it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special prize port.

  In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in a special winning opening, and a prize ball is easily obtained. In this example, this is also called “small hit RUSH”. Is displayed.

  Further, in this example, the case where the opening time of the special variable winning prize ball device 17 (special winning opening) is made different depending on which of the small hit types is the small hits A to C has been described. It is not limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be made different depending on which of the small hit types is the small hits A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning prize ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of the small hit B or the small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning prize ball device 17 may be configured to be opened two to eleven times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable prize ball device 17 is somewhat short, by opening the special variable prize ball device 17 for four seconds four times, the special variable prize ball device 17 (special prize opening) is executed. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a certain amount, and various modes are conceivable. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are the three types of the small hits A to C is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and is configured to provide, for example, four or more small hit types. Is also good.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 044IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbol is not normally changed. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 second, the symbol determination time of 0.2 second, and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, the game ball is played. The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning prize ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. The variable prize ball device 6B is in the open state because the time is longer than the time when the game sphere passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball reaches the variable prize ball device 6B in a state where the symbol is not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before the control is performed. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not normally changed to be won in the variable winning ball device 6B.

  In the characteristic portion 044IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is performed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). (See step S26). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is in the probable change state (high probability state) in any of the non-KT state, the first KT state, and the second KT state in the ordinary symbol process processing in step S26. Regardless of whether or not there is a jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not to make a regular hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

  In this characteristic portion 044IW, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same in each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, respectively, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the same as the second symbol. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable prize ball device 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 second in the 1KT state and increasing it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been described. I can't. For example, the closing time (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be made different by making the fluctuating time and the symbol fixing time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and if the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. By doing so, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be different. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the above methods, winning in the special winning opening in the first KT state can be suppressed. .

  In the characteristic unit 044IW, as will be described later, in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting a high base flag indicating that the state is the high base state. As shown in 10-14 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. In the second KT state, by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the variable winning prize ball device 6B is opened. The time is controlled to be shorter.

  For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIG. 10-12 (1) to FIG. The variable prize ball device 6B shown in FIG. 14 (1) is controlled by a first opening pattern (long opening) for long-time opening, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14. The variable winning prize ball device 6B shown in (2) may be controlled in a second opening pattern (short opening) in which it is opened for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the control may be performed such that the special flag is not set in other states including the big hit game state.

  Further, even in the first KT state, when performing the low probability / last change display in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened. For example, the special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the special symbol change in the 50 special symbol reduced change periods in the low probability / first KT state. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable when the variable winning prize ball device 6B is long opened when performing left-hit notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

  As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 6B, a flag for shortening and changing the variable display of the special symbol is further used. In this case, the display of the special symbol may be controlled, and in this case, the control may be performed by separately managing the special flag and the flag for the shortened change.

  Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in a case where the opening probability of the variable winning prize ball device 6B is increased in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. In this case, it is possible to prevent the variable winning prize ball device 6B from winning a prize, and to prevent a right-handing operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  In this characteristic portion 044IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, and the variable prize sphere is not changed in a state where the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to take a strategy aiming at the timing of stopping the change of the second special symbol. The variable prize ball device 6B does not open until the game ball that has passed through the variable prize ball device 6B or the special variable prize ball device 17 allows the special prize port to win. On the other hand, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the opening time of the variable prize ball device 6B before the game ball reaches the variable prize ball device 6B after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 is shortened by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Is set to be started, so that in the first KT state, it is possible to eliminate a capture element by a shooting operation aiming at a small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

  FIG. 10-15 and FIG. 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 15, the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of special symbols. This is an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a pattern fluctuation pattern. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of the variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5. Control.

  The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is to be out. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 10R probability variation big hit. . The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a 6R probability variation big hit. . The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 specifying command (6R normal big hit specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R normal big hit. . The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a 2R probability variation big hit. . The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 specifying command (2R normal big hit specifying command)) for specifying that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design specified by the variation pattern command is a 2R normal big hit. . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In the characteristic portion 044IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since the display result specifying command for the first special symbol can be determined to be the display result specifying command received immediately before the second variation pattern command, the display result specifying command for the second special symbol can be determined. Although the designation command can be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

  Also, instead of the game control microcomputer 100 transmitting the display result designation command, the microcomputer 100 responds to each of the 10R probability change big hit / 6R probability change big hit / 6R normal change big hit / 2R certain change big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / out. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is finished. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command for specifying that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 has been started (right-handed lighting start designation command).

  The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

  The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

  The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command transmitted from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. B000 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the start of a big hit game (big hit start specifying command: fanfare specifying command). B001 (H) is an effect control command for specifying the end of the big hit game (big hit end specifying command: ending specifying command). B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) for specifying the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of a special winning opening) for designating a display during a round during a big hit game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening a special winning opening) for specifying a display after a round during a big hit game (display of an interval between rounds).

  The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved storage number has not reached four. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (a second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a second start winning opening in a state where the second number of stored memories has not reached four. Note that a command indicating the first number of reserved storages may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second number of retained storages may be transmitted as the second effective start winning designation command. In the example, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

  The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that a game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that designates the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol has not been changed and the first hold storage is not stored). Wait demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) designating that the second customer is in the waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol has not been changed and the second holding memory is not stored). Wait demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Also, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

  The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low-precision / non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low-precision / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the high probability / second KT state.

  The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for specifying the currently set value. The set value is set to “XX”. For example, when the setting value is set to “1”, the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the setting value command. Further, for example, when the setting value is set to “6”, the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

  When the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) receives the above effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 10-15 and FIG. 10-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. In addition, effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command relating to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating a game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special figure process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not perform the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 044 IWS50A). Note that the case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), that is, neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first reserved storage number (step 044IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the first reserved storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS52A).

  If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and (Step 044IWS53A), decrease the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 044 IWS54A). That is, in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is converted into the first reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always matched with the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are determined. The order of extraction is also stored so that it can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 044IWS55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 044 IWS55A. Is executed, the set value command is also transmitted.

  The timing for transmitting the set value command is not limited to the timing shown in this example. For example, the set value command may be transmitted every time the variable display is completed, or the set value command may be transmitted during the variable display. Or may be configured to perform

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variable flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is the low probability / non-KT state, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variable flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is the low probability / first KT state, and the low-probability / first KT background designation command is determined. When the probable variable flag is on and the high base flag is on, the high probability / first KT state is determined. If it is determined that the high-precision / first KT background designation command is given, and if the probability variable flag is on and the high base flag is off, it is determined that the state is the high probability / second KT state and the high-accuracy / second KT background designation command is given Send.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating (step 044IWS57A). Specifically, if the second big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the flow shifts to step 044IWS69A without performing the processing of step 044IWS58A and thereafter. With this, when the change of the first special symbol is started during the change of the big hit of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly lose the jackpot regardless of whether the big hit determination value is stored.

  In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) of a hit as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 044IWS59A, so that at the time of the start winning, Regardless of which hit determination random number has been obtained, the hit may be forcibly set to be off.

  Also, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57A, the process of steps 044IWS58A to S63A is not performed, and the random number value (fixed value) of the loss is set as the hit determination random number. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired at the time of the start winning.

  When the big hit of the second special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit judgment random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 044IWS58A), and executes the big hit judgment module (step 044IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step 044IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the change display of the first special symbol (step 044IWS61A). . Then, based on the random number for hit type determination, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 10R positive variable hit, a 6R positive variable hit, or a 6R normal big hit (step 044IWS62A), the big hit type is stored (step 044IWS63A), and step 044IWS69A. Move to

  If it is determined in step 044IWS60A that no big hit has occurred, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 044IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 044IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is made based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (step 0444IWS65A). Step 044IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for hit type determination (step 044IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 044IWS68A). In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, the flow shifts to step 044IWS69A.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is “0” (step 044IWS69A), and if the value is “0”, step 044IWS75A. Move to. When the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 044IWS70A), It is determined whether or not it has become “0” (step 044IWS71A). If the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the flow shifts to step 044 IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the game is in the high base state (step 044IWS72A) and shortens the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that the control is being performed is reset (step 044 IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of the fluctuation (step 044IWS74A). Then, control goes to a step 044IWS75A.

  In the characteristic portion 044IW, as described later, the high base flag is set and the number of times of performing the variable display in the high base state is managed because the low probability is set at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / first KT state) and the variable display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 044IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 044IWS72A and S72B. At the same time, the special figure time saving flag is reset in steps 044 IWS 73 A and S 73 B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

  In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing right-handed notification and continuing right-handed state. Although the high base state is ended as the gaming state, the variation reduction common to the first KT state is achieved. This is a flag for setting the state as a common effect background with the first KT state.

  Then, in step 044IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 044IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step 044IWS75A is determined.

  In step 044IWS59A, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not a big hit is to be made using one of the non-probable change big hit determination table and the probable change big hit determination table.

  FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the special symbol variation display is being shortened is being controlled. Is confirmed (step 044 IWS1700A). In this example, the special figure time saving flag is set and the special symbol change display is shortened, so that it is more advantageous to execute the change display of the second special symbol (FIG. 10-7). 10-9), the small hit is likely to occur, and the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variable pattern table shown in FIG. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 044IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 044 IWS1702A).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 044IWS1701A and S1702A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is used (step 044 IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, a variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1704A).

  Also, when the variation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 044 IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and sets the variation time. Is started (step 044IWS1705A), and the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 044IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol change processing (step 044IWS1707A).

  FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the ordinary accessory control process (step S120) (step 044IWS1120A). Note that the case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), that is, neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a jackpot if it has not been transmitted yet, and Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to effect control CPU 120. The transmission is controlled (step 044IWS1121A).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 044IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 044IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0444IWS1123A). Step 044 IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 044IWS1130A).

  If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044IWS1125A). Whether the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a second big hit flag indicating a big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

  If the large special symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 044IWS1126A). Whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is determined, for example, by setting the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is terminated.

  If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 044IWS1127A). . Note that whether or not the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the change display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process ends.

  If the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 checks whether the big hit type is a 10R certain hit big hit or a 6R certain hit big hit (step 044IWS1128A). It can be determined whether or not the 10R probability variable hit or the 6R probability variable hit is, for example, by checking the type of the big hit stored in step 044IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variable hit or a 6R probability variable hit, the process is terminated.

  This is either the case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 044IWS1125A), or the case where the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 044IWS1126A). If the first special symbol variation display is not being executed (that is, a 6R normal big hit) is being executed (Y in step 044IWS1127A, N in step 044IWS1128A), the CPU 103 sends the first forced symbol to the effect control CPU 120. Control for transmitting the finalization designation command is performed (step 044IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S113A) (step 044IWS1130A).

  By executing the processes of steps 044IWS1125A to S1129A, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the variation display of the second special symbol has a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol which is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example) is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol is changed. A large hit and a small hit are prevented from occurring at the same time with the second special symbol. In this case, on the side of the effect control CPU 120, if the variation display of the first special symbol is determined to be forcible, the variation of the decoration symbol is determined based on the second compulsory symbol determination designation command transmitted in step 044IWS1129A. Control is performed so as to forcibly display the missing symbol as a display result.

  In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability change is a large hit (in this example, a 10R probability variable hit or a 6R probability variable hit). If the first special symbol variation display is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y of step 044 IWS1128A). In this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Based on the fact that the small hit has occurred, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the process proceeds to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, N is determined in step 044IWS1120A, the processing of steps 044IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 044IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a certain variation big hit is being executed, the first variation time timer is set during the small hit game. Is interrupted and the first special symbol change display is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

  Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit is performed. Even in the case where there is, the first special symbol change processing is terminated as it is (see N of step 044 IWS1127A). Therefore, even if the change display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the change display of the first special symbol, which is a miss or a small hit, is being executed, the first change during the small hit game is also performed. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hitting game is ended, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

  FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 044IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag has been set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 044IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 044IWS2012A), and also performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2013A).

  In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (the second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the gaming state is controlled to the KT state, the right-hand operation is performed. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Accordingly, in the present example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on during the low probability / first KT state. However, the processing of steps 044IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B is executed to display the 50th variation display. When the process is started, the low probability / first KT state is ended, the state is shifted to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processing of steps 044IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed, thereby ending the 50th variation display. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the first special symbol display device 4A to derive and display the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step 044IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has been transmitted in step 044 IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, the first special symbol is forcibly set as the stop symbol. The out-of-design is derived and displayed.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step 044IWS2015A). If the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a big hit start flag indicating that a big hit is to be started (step 044IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first big hit flag (step 044IWS2017A).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 044IWS2018A), and also performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2019A). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2027A.

  By executing the processing of steps 044IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the lighting of the right-hand display 26 is started when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so that it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  In this example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, so that the right hit is performed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The lighting of the display 26 may be started.

  If the first big hit flag is not set (N of step 044IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 044IWS2020A). If the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 044IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening process (step 044IWS2026A). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2027A.

  In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform a right-handing operation during the small hitting game. However, as described above, in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only the small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to enter the special winning opening. Therefore, in the present example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is not turned on, and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 044IWS2027A).

  In this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right strike notification that prompts the player to fire a game ball to the right of the game area. I have. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification for prompting the player to fire the game ball aiming at the pass gate 41 as the right strike notification can be executed. May be.

  Also, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right strike notification and the launch promotion notification are not executed, and in the state where the game ball has won the first start winning opening, the right strike notification and the launch promotion notification are performed. (In this case, since the game is in the gate passage waiting state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not immediately started even if the game ball wins the first starting winning opening, and the first reserved symbol is stored). May be configured.

  Conversely, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, sound output of a small volume or small screen display). Thus, a left-handed notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball to the left of the game area may be performed. On the other hand, in a case where the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, a sound output of a large volume, A left-handed notification may be made by a large-screen display. With such a configuration, the launch notification can be accurately performed. In particular, with the above configuration, for a player who has accidentally fired a game ball to the right of the game area, while performing a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is low, Alternatively, for a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, the left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge a player who intentionally performs a right-hand operation to return to a left-hand operation from a store clerk of the game store.

  Further, in the above case, a left-handed notification may be made when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, in the passing gate 41, when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, five times) within a predetermined period (for example, one minute), a left-hitting notification is performed. A left-handed notification may be made when a small number (eg, one) or more game balls are detected.

  In this characteristic part 044IW, the demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display which has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be performed.

  FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state where the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. Note that the case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not perform the variable display of the second special symbol.

  In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 044 IWS50B). Note that the case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), that is, neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second reserved storage number (step 044IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is checked. If the second reserved storage number is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS52B).

  If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and (Step 044IWS53B), reduce the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 044 IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is represented by the second reserved storage number = n− 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are always matched with the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It has become. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 044IWS55B). In the present example, the setting value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 044 IWS55B. Is executed, a set value command is also transmitted.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS56B). The specific manner of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the processing shown in step 044 IWS 56 A of the first special symbol normal processing.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the first special symbol is undergoing a big hit change (step 044IWS57B). Specifically, if the first big hit flag indicating that a big hit is set based on the change display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating, the process shifts to step 044IWS69B without performing the process of step 044IWS58B and thereafter. Thus, when the change of the second special symbol is started during the change of the first special symbol, a large forcible judgment value is forcibly removed regardless of whether the big hit determination value is stored.

  In addition, the method of forcibly removing is not limited to the method described above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) of a loss as a hit determination random number is performed, and the process proceeds to step 044IWS59B, so that at any time during the start winning, May be forcibly removed regardless of whether the hit determination random number has been obtained.

  Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step 044IWS57B, the process of steps 044IWS58B to S63B is not performed, and a random number value (fixed value) of a loss is set as the hit determination random number. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly removed regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired at the time of the start winning.

  If the big hit of the first special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit judgment random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 044IWS58B), and executes the big hit judgment module (step 044IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines a jackpot if the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step 044IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the change display of the second special symbol (step 044IWS61B). . Then, it is determined based on the hit type determination random number whether the big hit type is 10R certain big hit, 6R certain big hit, 2R certain big hit, or 2R normal big hit (step 044IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored (step 044IWS63B). ), And the flow shifts to step 044IWS69B.

  If it is determined in step 044IWS60B that it is not a big hit, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a small hit determination module (step 044IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 044IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made based on the display of the change of the second special symbol (step 044IWS65B). Step 044IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for hit type determination (step 044IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 044IWS68B). In the present example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, control goes to a step 044IWS69B.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is “0” (step 044IWS69B), and if it is “0”, proceeds to step 044IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, when the state is the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 044IWS70B), It is determined whether or not it has become “0” (step 044IWS71B). If the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the flow shifts to step 044 IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 044IWS72B) and shortens the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that the control is being performed is reset (step 044 IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 044IWS74B). Then, control goes to a step 044IWS75B.

  Then, in step 044IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 044IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, a symbol to be stopped immediately before step 044IWS75B is determined.

  In step 044IWS59B, it is determined whether or not a big hit is to be made by using any of the non-probability change big hit determination table and the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

  The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) illustrated in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process has been described. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 044 IWS1700A, and checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variable pattern table shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the probability change flag and the high base flag are set or not, and As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any one of the variation pattern tables for the second special symbol for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I) is selected. For example, if the probable variable flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Is selected, and if it is the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (E) is selected. If it is the 50th variation, the second variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected. Select the special symbol variation pattern table. For example, if both the probable change flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first change is the second special symbol change shown in FIG. 10-9 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

  FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol change process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 044IWS1120B). Note that the case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit This is the case where the value does not indicate the end processing (step S128), that is, neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a jackpot if it has not been transmitted yet, and One of the display result specifying commands (display result 1 specifying command, display result 2 specifying command, display result 3 specifying command, display result 5 specifying command, display result 6 specifying command, display result 7 specifying command) based on the determination result Is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1121B).

  Next, the CPU 103 decrements the second variable time timer by 1 (step 044IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 044IWS1123B), performs control to transmit the second symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 0444IWS1123B). Step 044 IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 044IWS1130B).

  If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044IWS1125B). Whether the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined, for example, by setting the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a first big hit flag indicating a big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

  If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 044IWS1126B). Whether the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is determined, for example, by setting the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by confirming whether or not a first small hit flag indicating a small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is terminated.

  If the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a large hit (step 044IWS1127B). . Note that whether or not the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the change display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

  If the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 checks whether the big hit type is a 10R certain big hit, a 6R certain big hit, or a 2R certain big hit (step 044IWS1128B). . Whether it is a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, or a 2R probability variable hit can be determined, for example, by checking the type of the jackpot stored in step 044IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, or a 2R probability variable hit, the process is terminated as it is.

  The case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 044IWS1125B) or the case where the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 044IWS1126B), is a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, and In the case where the variation display of the second special symbol which does not become any of the 2R probability change jackpots (that is, becomes the 2R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 044IWS1127B, N in step 044IWS1128B), the CPU 103 sets the CPU 120 for effect control. Is controlled to transmit the second compulsory symbol determination designation command (step 044IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 044IWS1130B).

  By executing the processing of steps 044IWS1125B to S1129B, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variation display of the second special symbol which is a normal big hit (in this example, the 2R normal big hit) is being executed, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is changed. A large hit and a small hit are prevented from occurring at the same time with the second special symbol. In this case, in the effect control CPU 120, if the variation display of the second special symbol is determined to be forcible, the variation of the decoration symbol is determined based on the second compulsory symbol determination designation command transmitted in step 044IWS1129B. Control is performed so as to forcibly display the missing symbol as a display result.

  In the present example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, Alternatively, if the second special symbol variation display of “2R probable big hit” is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (refer to Y of step 044IWS1128B). Based on the fact that the symbol change display is a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game shifts to a small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, N is determined in step 044IWS1120B and the processing in steps 044IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the update of the second variable time timer in step 044IWS1122B is not performed. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a certain variation big hit is being executed, the second variation time timer is set during the small hit game. Update is interrupted and the second special symbol change display is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

  Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a loss or a small hit is performed. Even in the case where there is, the second special symbol change processing is terminated as it is (refer to N of step 044 IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and the change display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit is being executed, the second change during the small hit game is also performed. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hitting game is ended, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

  With the above configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time-saving state), the remaining second holding memory can be consumed, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, a variable winning prize ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the prize ball device 6A (first starting winning port), and a prize ball device for the second special symbol (to the right of the game area). In a gaming machine configured to provide a starting winning opening which is not a variable winning ball device, and to shift to a normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends. As described above, a configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, as the variation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of occurrence of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol increases. However, the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed. The frequency of playing the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state can be suppressed, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent can be further suppressed. Can be.

  FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the lighting extension flag has been set (step 044IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag has been set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 044IWS2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 044IWS2012B), and also performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2013B).

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display a stop symbol of the second special symbol (step 0444IWS2014B). In this case, if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designating command has been transmitted in step 044IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation, the second special symbol is forcibly set as the stop symbol. The out-of-design is derived and displayed.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 044IWS2015B). If the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a big hit start flag (step 044IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 044IWS2017B).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 044IWS2018B), and also performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2019B). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2027B.

  By executing the processing of steps 044IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the lighting of the right-hand display 26 is started when a big hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so that it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-hand operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 044IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 044IWS2020B). If the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to transmit a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 044IWS2022B).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 044IWS2023B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 044IWS2024B), and at the same time, Control is performed to transmit a striking start command (step 044 IWS2025B).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening process (step 044IWS2026B). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2027B.

  By executing the processing of steps 044IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so that it is better for the player to perform a right-handing operation during the small hitting game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

  However, in the present example, even if a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be lit when in the KT state. Therefore, in the present example, by performing the determination processing of step 044 IWS2023B, if the small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started repeatedly. And the processing of transmitting a right-turn lighting start designation command is not performed.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 044IWS2027B).

  FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing the accessory control normal process (step S120) in the accessory control process process. In the accessory control normal processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the big hit start flag is set (step 044IWS2101). If the big hit start flag has not been set, the process ends.

  If the big hit start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit start flag (step 044IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening timer before opening (step 044IWS2103), sets opening pattern data for round 1 according to the type of jackpot (step 044IWS2104), and sets "1" in the round number counter indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot. Is set (step 044 IWS2105).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 044IWS2106).

  FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a detection signal has been input from the gate switch 21 (step 044IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input, the CPU 103 resets the probability variable flag, the high base flag, and the special figure time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (if set). Step 044 IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 044IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step 044IWS2504).

  In the characteristic portion 044IW, the gate passing waiting process is executed, so that the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol, but the pass gate 41 is played. On condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21, the game shifts to a big hit game.

  FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit opening processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 044IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is turned on, that is, if a game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected, the CPU 103 determines the number of winning balls for counting the number of game balls that have won the special winning opening. The value of the counter is incremented by 1 (step 044 IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting the special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2403).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the V-region switch 044IW106 is in the ON state (step 0444IWS2404). If V-region switch 044IW106 is on, that is, if a game ball that has entered V-region 044IW104 is detected, CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered V-region 044IW104. (Step 044 IWS2405).

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 044 IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the flow shifts to step 044IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening by 1 (step 044IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step 044 IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 044IWS2406) or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 044IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. After stopping, the special winning opening is controlled to be closed (step 044IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after opening the special winning opening to the CPU 120 for effect control (step 044IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the round number counter by 1 (step 044IWS2411).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-big hit opening processing (step 044IWS2412).

  FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a big hit end display timer is set (step 044IWS2200). If the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 shifts to step 044IWS2202. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the big hit end display timer to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). The value is set (step 044 IWS2201), and the process ends.

  In step 044IWS2202, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 044IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 044IWS2203). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS2203), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 044IWS2204). If the V winning flag has been set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 044IWS2205), sets the probable change flag, and shifts to the probable change state (high probability state) (step 044IWS2206).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 10R certain jackpot or the 2R certain jackpot (step 044IWS2207). It is possible to determine whether or not it is a 10R probability change big hit or a 2R probability change hit, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 044IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 044IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 044IWS2208). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2215. In the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / low base state (high (Probability / second KT state).

  If it is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 2R probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot ended this time is the 6R probability variable jackpot (step 044IWS2209). It is to be noted that whether or not it is the 6R probability-change big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step 044IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 0444IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability change jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 044IWS2210), further sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 044IWS2211). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability change big hit, if a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

  In the case of the 6R probability change big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 044 IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the end of the big hit game based on the 6R probability changing big hit, the game is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent variable display. In step 044IWS69A of the first special symbol normal process and step 0444IWS69B of the second special symbol normal process, it is determined as Y, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter of step 0444IWS70A and step 044IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  If it is not a 6R probability variable jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R ordinary jackpot or a 2R ordinary jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 044IWS2212) and sets the special figure time reduction flag. To the KT state (step 044 IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 044 IWS2214). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R ordinary jackpot or a 2R ordinary jackpot, the state is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 044IWS2215).

  FIG. 10-28 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 044IWS2300). If the small hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 shifts to step 044IWS2302. If the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small hit end display timer to a display corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 044IWS2301), and the process ends.

  At step 044IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 044IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 044IWS2303). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS2303), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special figure time saving flag is set (step 044IWS2304). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the right-handed indicator 26 is lit (step 044IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is on, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 044IWS2306), and transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 044 IWS2307).

  In this example, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on at the start of the small hit game (steps 044IWS2023B to S2025B). By executing the processing of steps 044IWS2304 to S2307, the lighting of the right-hand indicator 26 ends at the end of the small hitting game.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 044IWS2308).

  Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic portion 044IW will be described. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a manner of transition of the gaming state in the characteristic portion 044IW. First, in the characteristic portion 044IW, in a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a shooting operation (left-handed) of a game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, a start winning prize occurs mainly in the first starting winning opening, and a variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the change display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, a 10R certain variable big hit, a 6R certain variable big hit, or a 6R normal large hit mainly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability change big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / The state shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / high base state (high probability / high base (1st KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. If a 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the fluctuating display of 50 times is completed (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

  After shifting to the KT state (high-probability / high-base state, low-probability / high-base state, high-probability / low-base state), in this feature portion 044IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. To launch the game ball (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, since the change display of the second special symbol is mainly performed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R certain change big hit, a 6R certain change big hit, a 2R certain change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit mainly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability is obtained after the big hit game ends. / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 6R probability variation big hit is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so that once the high probability / high probability is reached. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. Also, if a 2R normal big hit occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuating display of 50 times ends (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

  As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, in the case where a 6R probability variable big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability is obtained after the big hit game ends. / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. If a 2R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the game shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuating display of 50 times ends (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214). In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 2R normal big hit is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state will loop at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit has occurred and the low probability / high base state has been established, if the 50-time variable display is completed without the next big hit occurring, FIG. As shown, the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 044IWS69A to S73A and S69B to S73B).

  As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit is 15%. % (See FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 6R-probable big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / High base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the fluctuating display of 50 times ends (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

  In FIG. 10-29, the case where the change display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) has been described. A display could be performed. In this case, if a 10R probability change big hit or a 2R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). become. In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 2R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high level is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

  In FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R certain-variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high level is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

  In FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R certain-variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high level is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

  Also, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is displayed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R certain-variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability change big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). When the 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high level is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the change display of 50 times ends. The base state will be maintained.

  Next, the ordinary symbol process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process process, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 044IWS5111), Control for transmitting a gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 044IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes a gate switch passage process (step 044IWS5113).

  In the characteristic unit 044IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 044IWS5111-S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In the characteristic portion 044IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area, but is the gate passing waiting state before the big hit game is started after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed? Regardless of whether the command is passed or not, a gate passage designation command is transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes any one of the processes shown in steps 044IWS510 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  In this characteristic part 044IW, regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 044IWS5111, the gate switch passage processing of step 044IWS5113 is executed. Normally, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the normal symbol change display is executed. In the gate passage waiting state, the normal symbol is displayed even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. May not be executed.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the passing gate 41 is used as a common gate for the normal starting area and the operating area. However, the special symbol processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Since the process is executed before the symbol process process (refer to step S26), after the process of detecting the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operation region, the process of the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal start region is performed. A detection process is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

  Gate switch passage processing (step 044 IWS 5113): The CPU 103 sets the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter (a counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the passage gate 41) to the maximum value (in this example, “ 4)). If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. In addition, the LED of the general-purpose reservation display 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination and storing the same in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of gate passage storages.

  Ordinary symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol can be started (for example, when the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is a value indicating step 044IWS5100, specifically, the ordinary symbol In the case where the display of the ordinary symbol is not displayed on the display 20 and the opening and closing operation of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 20 is not performed, the gate passage storage is performed. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of stored gate passages is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not a stop symbol of a normal symbol is a hit symbol). Then, the variable time of the ordinary symbol is set in the ordinary symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol change process (step 044 IWS5101).

  Ordinary symbol variation process (step 044 IWS 5101): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary symbol stopped symbol display time in the ordinary symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “2”) indicating the ordinary symbol stop processing (step 044IWS5102).

  Ordinary symbol stop processing (step 044IWS5102): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, determines whether or not the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the ordinary symbol normal processing (step 044 IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the normal symbol process timer is set to the time before the opening of the normal electric accessory, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “3”) indicating the ordinary electric accessory pre-opening process (step 044 IWS5103).

  Normal electric accessory opening pre-process (step 044IWS5103): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary electric accessory actuation time in the ordinary symbol process timer and sets the timer. And the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “4”) indicating the ordinary electric auditors product activation process (step 044IWS5104).

  Normal electric accessory actuation process (step 044IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures a normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the ordinary symbol ordinary processing (step 044 IWS5100).

  FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the number of stored gate passages is 0 by checking the count value of the number-of-gate-passed storage counter (step 044IWS5121). If the number of stored gate passages is 0 (Y in step 044 IWS5121), the processing is terminated as it is. If the number of stored gate passages is not 0 (N of step 044IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads the random number value for normal symbol per contact determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages = 1 (step 044IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage number counter by one and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 044IWS5123). That is, the random number for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of stored gate passages = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective numbers of stored gate passages are always the same as the order of the number of stored gate passages = 1, 2, 3, 4. Are matched.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number (normal symbol hit determination random number value) using a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol, and determines whether or not to hit the normal symbol. Is determined (step 044 IWS5127). Note that in the feature part 044IW, in step 044IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly applies 99/100 The probability is decided to be a normal symbol.

  In step 044IWS5127, if the read-out normal symbol hit determination random number is within the hit range (if it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets a hit symbol as a display result (step 044IWS5128), and proceeds to step 044IWS5130. If the read-out normal symbol hit determination random number is not within the hit range (if it is a loss) in step 044IWS5127, the CPU 103 sets a loss symbol as a display result (step 044IWS5129), and proceeds to step 044IWS5130.

  In step 044IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in S04131 of the step 044IWS5130). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if the normal state or the second KT state, the normal symbol variation time is set to 1.0 second in the ordinary symbol process timer (N of step 044 IWS5130, S5132).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the ordinary symbol variation processing (step 044IWS5101) (step 044IWS5133).

  FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol stop processing (step 044IWS5102). In the ordinary symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the ordinary symbol process timer by one (step 044IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step 044IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 044 IWS3702), the process is terminated as it is.

  When the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the ordinary symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol (step 0444IWS5127). Is confirmed) (step 044 IWS3703). It should be noted that whether or not the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol is determined, for example, by setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined as a hit in step 044IWS5127, and confirming whether or not the flag is set. Can be.

  When it is determined that the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is not a hit symbol but a lost symbol (N of step 044IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to the value indicating the ordinary symbol normal process (step 044IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to “0” (step 044 IWS3708).

  In step 044IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 0444IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 044IWS3704). That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 044IWS3706). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if the normal state or the second KT state is set, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 044IWS3705). .

  Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory pre-opening process (step 044IWS5103) (step 044IWS3707).

  FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory pre-opening process (step 044 IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory pre-opening process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by one (step 044IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the ordinary symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the ordinary symbol process timer has timed out (step 044IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 044 IWS3802), the process is terminated as it is.

  When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the time before the opening of the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag has been set (step 044IWS3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 044IWS3805). When the high base flag is not set, that is, when the normal state or the second KT state is set, 0.2 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 044IWS3804).

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the normal electric accessory opening time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the ordinary electric accessory opening time is set to 0.2 seconds in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which the second start winning opening is easier to start and win than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls are less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

  It should be noted that the manner of control for facilitating the start winning at the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to the method shown by the characteristic portion 044IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device is opened). The number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 6B may be set to two in the first KT state while the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is set to one. By doing so, in the first KT state, the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened can be increased to make it easier for the second starting winning port to start and win.

  Further, for example, in the first KT state, compared to the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B described above and the variable winning ball device 6B May be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of times of opening.

  Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to an open state (step 044IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the ordinary electric auditors product activation process (step 044IWS5104) (step 044IWS3807).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIGS. 10-34 to 10-36 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

  In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step 044IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where they match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step 044IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 044 IWS 613). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 044 IWS 614), effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in a set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 044). 044IWS615).

  If the received effect control command is a fluctuation pattern command (step 044IWS616), effect control CPU 120 stores the received fluctuation pattern command in a fluctuation pattern command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 044IWS617). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 044IWS618).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 044IWS619), effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 044IWS620). ).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol confirmation designation commands (the first symbol confirmation designation command, the second symbol confirmation designation command, the first forced symbol confirmation designation command, the second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 044IWS621) The effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 044IWS622). For example, when a first symbol confirmation designation command is received, a first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced symbol confirmation command reception flag is set.

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 044IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start right-hand display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 044IWS624). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the big hit start designation command reception flag (step 044IWS625).

  If the received effect control command is the jackpot end designation command (step 044IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the right-hand display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 044IWS627). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 044IWS628).

  In this example, by executing the processing of steps 044IWS624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit start specifying command (step 044IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start specifying command reception flag (step 044IWS630).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 044IWS631), effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 044IWS632).

  If the received effect control command is a right-stroke lighting start designation command (step 044IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the right-strike notification LED 37 (step 044IWS634).

  If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 044IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 044IWS636).

  If the received effect control command is a low-probability / non-KT background designation command (step 044IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, The control for displaying the image (blue background image) is performed (step 044 IWS638). Further, if set, effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 044IWS639).

  If the received effect control command is a low-probability / first KT background designation command (step 044IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a low probability / background image according to the first KT state (for example, Control for displaying the image (green background image) is performed (step 044 IWS641). The effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 044IWS642), and if it is set, the high probability state flag indicating the high probability state and the second KT state indicating the second KT state. The 2KT state flag is reset (step 044 IWS643).

  If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 044IWS644), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a high probability / background image according to the first KT state (for example, Control for displaying the image (yellow background image) is performed (step 044 IWS645). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 044IWS646), and if set, resets the second KT state flag (step 044IWS647).

  If the received effect control command is a high-precision / second KT background designation command (step 044IWS648), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the high probability / second KT state (for example, Control for displaying a red background image is performed (step 044 IWS649). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 044IWS650), and if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 044IWS651).

  If the received effect control command is the special winning opening winning designation command (step 044IWS652), the effect control CPU 120 counts the prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits occur continuously in the second KT state. The value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 (step 044IWS653). Next, the effect control CPU 120 generates the small hits in the second KT state in the second KT state based on the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition. If the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 indicating the number of prize balls is displayed, control is performed to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 (step 044 IWS654).

  In this example, the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is started when a 10R certain-variable big hit or a 2R certain-variable big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and is different from the 10R certain-variable big hit or the 2R certain-variable big hit. When the big hit occurs (that is, when the second KT state is ended), the display is ended.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or greater than any threshold value (step 044IWS655). If the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or greater than any of the thresholds, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to set the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball count counter after addition. (Step 044IWS656). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball counter after the addition is 1000 or 1005, 1010, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 in the current prize winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “1000OVER” as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 044IWS657), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter (step 044IWS658). Next, based on the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after the addition, if the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is displayed on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 determines that The control for updating the middle prize ball number display 1 is performed (step 044IWS659).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball counter after addition is equal to or larger than any threshold value (step 044IWS660). If the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or greater than any of the thresholds, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to set the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball count counter after addition. (Step 044IWS661). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 in the current prize winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and a small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “1000OVER” as the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2.

  In this example, the case where the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 is updated or the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 is displayed based on the winning in the special winning opening or the special winning opening is shown. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even when a winning in the general winning opening 10 occurs during the consecutive small winnings in the second KT state, a value corresponding to the number of awarding balls for winning in the general winning opening 10 is set to the number of consecutive small winning awards balls. The value may be added to the counter to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 1 or the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display 2 may be displayed.

  If the received effect control command is any other command, effect control CPU 120 executes processing of storing the received effect control command and setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 044IWS662). ). Then, control goes to a step 044 IWS611.

  FIG. 10-37 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (step 044IWS811). Whether or not a variation pattern command has been received is determined, for example, by setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command has been received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 044 IWS 811, it is sufficient to check whether the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

  If the variation pattern command has been received, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag has been set (step 044IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 044 IWS813). It should be noted that whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. Can be determined by confirming whether Unless the change display of the first special symbol is performed (that is, the case of performing the change display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 044IWS815).

  If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not to perform the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step 044IWS814). Note that whether or not to execute the variation display of the second special symbol is determined, for example, by determining whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. Can be determined by confirming whether Unless the variation display of the second special symbol is performed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed), the process is terminated. When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 044IWS816).

  By executing the processing of steps 044IWS812 to S815, in the characteristic portion 044IW, when the non-KT state is set, the display of the decoration symbol is changed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the display of the change of the first special symbol. When the display is in the KT state, the display of the decorative symbol is changed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the KT state is set, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the non-KT state is set. The display of the decoration design is not changed.

  FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol (step 044IWS920). Note that whether or not to execute the first special symbol change display is determined, for example, by the change pattern command stored in the change pattern command storage area designating the first change patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is. In the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variable display is a small hit (step 044IWS921). Note that whether or not the current fluctuation display is a small hit is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. Can be determined. If it is a small hit change, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach out-of-reach symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 044IWS922).

  As described above, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, only the small hit A can be obtained, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game is performed. Can hardly be expected to win. Therefore, in the present example, when the process of step 044 IWS 920 to S922 is executed and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents the player from having excessive expectations.

  In the case of performing the variation display of the second special symbol (N in step 044IWS920) or in the case of no small hit variation (N in step 044IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variation display result. Is determined (step 044 IWS923). At step 044 IWS 923, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of position), only the out-of-left design or the right-and-left decoration design in which the left-middle-right decorative design does not completely match is displayed. The combination of the matched reach-losing symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are aligned with the symbol "7" among the odd symbols is determined. Also, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R probability variable jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the left middle right decorative symbol is an odd symbol other than “7” is determined. Also, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability change is a big hit), the combination of the symbols including the special symbol (the symbol “R” in this example) is determined. . When a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when a 6R normal big hit or a 2R normal big hit is determined), a combination of the symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are arranged in even-numbered symbols. To determine. When the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation display is out of order (step 044IWS924). Whether or not the current fluctuation display is out of order is determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by If it is not a deviation change, the process directly proceeds to step 044IWS928. If it is outlier fluctuation (Y in step 044IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the setting value suggestion effect indicating the currently set value. (Step 044 IWS925).

  In step 044 IWS 925, effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 044 IWS 615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using a table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggesting effect determination table for determining the presence or absence and the type of the setting value suggesting effect. Determine the presence and type of value suggestion effect.

  FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-39, the setting value suggestion effect determination table includes no setting value suggestion effect, a setting value suggestion effect A, a setting value suggestion effect B, a setting value suggestion effect C, a setting value suggestion effect D, and a setting value. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect E and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

  The setting value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is highest. The setting value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect that is executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution ratio. The setting value suggestion effect C is an effect that is executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. 10-39, the setting value “3”. Is the highest execution ratio. The setting value suggestion effect D is an effect that is executed by, for example, displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. 10-39, the setting value “4”. Is the highest execution ratio. The setting value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution ratio. Further, the setting value suggestion effect F is an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, for example, and as illustrated in FIG. 10-39, the setting value “ 6 ", the execution ratio is the highest.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag has been set (step 044IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the flow directly proceeds to step 044IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 044 IWS 926), that is, if it is the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit RUSH indicating that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is continued. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 044IWS927).

  FIG. 10-40 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-40, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B are respectively determined. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 10-40, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is “2”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is performed. Is the next highest, and when the set value is “3”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the set value is “4”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect Is the next highest, and when the set value is “5”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is further next highest, and when the set value is “6”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion execution ratio is the highest. It is lower.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 40, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest, and when the set value is “6”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is performed. Execution rate is the highest.

  In this example, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot probability is the lowest, and when the set value is “6”, the jackpot probability is the highest. Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value “1” is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the degree of continuous expectation is high), and the setting value “6”. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of expectation of continuation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is “6”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will be continued.

  As described above, the continuation expectation degree of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is an expectation degree that the control period to the second KT state becomes longer without occurrence of a big hit.

  Further, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues can be further increased.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, and the execution of the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. , A process table corresponding to the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 044IWS928).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of process data 1 in the process table selected in step 044IWS928 as the process timer and starts the process timer (step 044IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L and 8R) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 044 IWS930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  When the execution of the setting value suggestion effect is determined, the decoration is performed by executing the step 044IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) according to the process table including the setting value suggestion effect selected in step 044IWS928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the change display of the symbol (during the change of the loss).

  When the execution of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is determined, the process of step 044IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 044IWS928. Thus, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the change display of the decorative symbol (during the change in the second KT state).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decoration symbol variation time timer and starts the decoration symbol variation time timer (step 044IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 044IWS932).

  FIG. 10-41 is a flowchart illustrating the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process processing. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step 044IWS8101), and also decrements the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer by 1 (step 044IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 044 IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set to the process timer (step 044 IWS8104). In addition, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data which are set next (step 044IWS8105).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag has been set (step 044IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first symbol determination designation command has been received (for example, (1) Whether the confirmation command reception flag is set or not is confirmed (step 044 IWS8107). If the first symbol determination designation command has been received, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 044IWS8110).

  If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 044 IWS8108). If the first compulsory symbol determination designation command has been received, effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 044IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a lost symbol (step 044IWS8109). Then, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 044IWS8110).

  If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 044 IWS8106 (that is, if the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, (2) Whether the confirmation command reception flag is set or not is confirmed (step 044 IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 044IWS8114).

  If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received (for example, whether the second compulsory confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 044 IWS8112). If the second compulsory symbol determination designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 044IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a lost symbol (step 044IWS8113). Then, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 044IWS8114).

  If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 044IWS8108, or if the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has not been received in step 044IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 sets the decoration symbol variation time timer. It is determined whether or not has timed out (step 044 IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for a standby effect (step 044IWS8116). Then, effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 044IWS8117).

  In this example, as described above, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the case where the variation display of the first special symbol which is a loss, a small hit, and a certain variation big hit is being executed. During the small hit game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the change display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and when the change display of the second special symbol that is a loss, a small hit, and a certain change big hit is being performed, the small hit game is performed. Then, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decoration symbol variation time timer has timed out in step 044 IWS8115 without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command means that the updating of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted, This is a case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the process is switched to the standby effect by executing the processing of steps 044IWS8116 and S8117, and thereafter, the updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted, and finally, the special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol ends. The “stand-by effect” is, for example, an effect in which the decorative pattern on the middle left and right in the image display device 5 swings or slightly fluctuates to be in a temporary stop state.

  For example, when the image display device 5 also executes a variable display of a system small symbol, a fourth symbol, or the like, updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special time timer is interrupted. When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously performed, the variable display of the system small symbol and the fourth symbol is also continuously performed. When the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

  FIG. 10-42 and FIG. 10-43 are flowcharts showing the special figure hit wait processing (step S173) in the effect control process processing. In the special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 044IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 has been set, the flow shifts to step 044IWS9706. In the characteristic portion 044IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 044IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the big hit effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol is definitely displayed, but the big hit effect has not been executed yet, so that the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 044IWS9703 is performed. Without executing, the flow shifts to step 044IWS9706.

  If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 044 IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the flow shifts to step 044 IWS9716. In the characteristic part 044IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 044IWS9715. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit effect is executed. Therefore, when the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, it means that the small hit symbol is definitely displayed, but the small hit effect has not been executed yet, so that the decorative symbol stop symbol of step 044 IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 044 IWS9716 without executing the process.

  If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 stops the left-center-right decoration symbol (stop-off symbol, big-hit symbol) of the left-center-right decorative symbol being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , A small hit symbol) is determined (step 044IWS9703). In addition, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command or the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the process of replacing with a shifted symbol is performed in steps 044IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 044IWS9703 the lost symbol. Is controlled to confirm display.

  When the big hit symbol is determined and displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (Y in step 044IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 044IWS9705).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 044IWS9706). If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 044IWS9707).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the type of jackpot of the jackpot that has occurred this time is a 10R probability variable hit or a 2R probability variable hit (step 044IWS9708). It should be noted that whether the jackpot type is the 10R probability variable hit or the 2R probability variable hit is determined by, for example, confirming whether the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command or the display result 5 designation command. it can. If it is a 10R probability change jackpot or a 2R probability change hit, the flow directly proceeds to step 044IWS9710.

  If neither the 10R-probable jackpot nor the 2R-probable jackpot, the second KT state means that the second KT state ends after the current big hit game ends in the second KT state. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 clears the value of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of consecutive small hits occurring during the second KT state and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter to zero ( Step 044 IWS 9709).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 044IWS9710). Next, effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 044 IWS9711), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number, sound number) In accordance with the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, the various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 044IWS9712).

  After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the big hit effect process (step S176) (step 044IWS9713).

  If the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (N in step 044IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (Y in step 044IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 044 IWS9715).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hit start designation command has been received (step 044IWS9716). If the small hit start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 044IWS9717).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step 044IWS9718). Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state on the image display device 5 based on the updated value of the small hit continuous number counter. Then, control is performed to update the small hit continuous number display 1 (step 044IWS9719).

  In the present example, the small hit continuous number display 1 is started when a 10R probable big hit or a 2R probable big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and a big hit other than the 10R probable big hit or the 2R probable big hit is displayed. The display is ended when the alarm occurs (that is, when the second KT state is ended).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the small hit continuation number counter after the addition is any one of the threshold values (step 044 IWS9720). If the value of the small hit continuous number counter after the addition is any of the threshold values, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to execute the small hit continuous number corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous number counter on the image display device 5. The control for displaying the display 2 is performed (step 044 IWS9721). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is 10, it means that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 times in the current small hit occurrence, and the threshold "10" is reached. It is determined that the number of consecutive small hits has reached 10, and the small hit continuous number display 2 indicating that the number of consecutive small hits has reached 10 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "10COMBO" as the small hit continuous number display 2.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small hit medium-duration effect (step 044IWS9722). Next, effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 044IWS9723), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) In accordance with the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, the various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 044IWS9724).

  Then, effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the small hit effect processing (step S174) (step 044IWS9725).

  If the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 044 IWS 9703 (that is, if a missing symbol is displayed) (N of step 044 IWS 9704 and N of step 044 IWS 9714), the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 044IWS9726).

  Next, a description will be given of an effect mode of the effect executed by the present feature unit 044IW. First, the effect of the setting value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-44 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect mode of a set value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute a set value suggestion effect in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is to be lost. As shown in FIG. 10-44 (A), when the display display 5 is performing the variation display of the left-middle-right decorative symbol, and when the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect comes, the timing shown in FIG. As shown in (3) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-44 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggestion effect is executed in a manner in which the image display device 5 displays the predetermined character images 044IW001, 044IW002, and 044IW003. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B1), the setting is performed by displaying the predetermined character image 044IW001 on the image display device 5 in a blue display color. A value suggestion effect is performed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B2), the set value is set in such a manner that the predetermined character image 044IW002 is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5. A suggestion effect is performed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (B3), the set value is set in such a manner that the predetermined character image 044IW003 is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5. A suggestion effect is performed.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-44, the case where the setting value suggestion effect A, the setting value suggestion effect C, and the setting value suggestion effect E are executed is shown. Indicates a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed in an orange display color when a set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when a set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the display color.

  In this example, which set value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern to be lost and the set value suggestion effect is executed. Can be expected.

  Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production will be described. FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In the present example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed in the variation display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

  In this example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), for example, a character display 044IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed that it is recognizable. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (A), when the variation display of the left-middle-right decoration symbol is executed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is performed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-45 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-45 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined effect images 044IW005 and 044IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case is shown in which an image of a racing car is displayed as the predetermined effect images 044IW005 and 044IW006. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, a mode in which the predetermined effect image 044IW005 is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 10-45 (B1). Thus, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (B2), the predetermined effect image 044IW005 is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

  In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion is performed by performing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect during the variation display of the decorative pattern which is the loss during the second KT state, or an effect image of any display color is displayed. Depending on whether the effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues.

  Next, the display mode of the right strike notification will be described. FIG. 10-46 is an explanatory diagram for describing a display mode of right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether a large hit has occurred in the variable display of the first special symbol or a large hit has been performed by performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the game is being played during the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see steps 044IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, based on the reception of the right-turn-on lighting designation command, the right-turn notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 10- (1) (steps 044IWS2019A, S2019B, S634). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), right-handed display 044IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 (see step 044IWS624).

  Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variation display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (2)) during the small hit game. , The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the CPU 103 (see step 044 IWS2024B). In addition, based on the reception of the right-turn-on lighting start command, the right-turn notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 10-46 (2) (see steps 044IWS2025B and S634). . However, unlike during the big hit game, the right-handed display 044IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (2).

  On the other hand, in the present example, when a small hit is made in the variation display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on and the right-hand indicator 26 is turned on during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. The lighting of the beating notification LED 37 is not performed, and the right-handed display 044IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not performed.

  Next, a description will be given of the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed. FIG. 10-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol is changed to a large change (in this example, 10R certain change). In the case of a big hit change that is a big hit or a 6R positive change big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (A), the change display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hitting game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step 044 IWS1128A Y).

  On the other hand, if the change display of the first special symbol is a big hit change which is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-47 (B). When this is done, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol (see N of step 044IWS1128A, step 044IWS1129A).

  In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the change display of the second special symbol during the change display of the first special symbol which is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (C), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hitting game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step N44IWS1127A N).

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is changed in a large change (in this example, 10R certain change). In the case of a big hit change such as a big hit, a 6R certain variable big hit, or a 2R certain variable big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, Step 044 IWS1128B Y).

  On the other hand, if the change display of the second special symbol is a big hit change that is a normal big hit (2R normal big hit in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-47 (E). When this is done, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol (see N of Step 0444IWS1128B, Step 044IWS1129B).

  In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (F), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, Step N44 IWS1127B N).

  The control method in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a modified example of the control method in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being performed.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-48 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (Step S112A) in the first modification. In FIG. 10-48, the processing of steps 044IWS1120A to S1127A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. .

  In the first modification, if the change display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1129A as it is, and transmits the first forced symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 044 IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-48, the process of step 044IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

  FIG. 10-49 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the first modification. In FIG. 10-49, the processing of steps 044IWS1120B to S1127B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the first modification, the determination processing of step 044IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. .

  In the first modification, if the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1129B as it is and transmits the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 044 IWS1129B). In FIG. 10-49, the process of step 044IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

  FIG. 10-50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol in the first modification.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the first special symbol a big hit variation that results in a certain variable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the change display of the first special symbol is forcibly changed to a lost symbol. Stop display is performed (N of step 044IWS1127A, see step 044IWS1129A).

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the change display of the second special symbol during the change display of the first special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hitting game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step N44IWS1127A N).

  If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the second special symbol a big hit variation which becomes a probable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the change display of the second special symbol is also forcibly changed to a lost symbol. Stop display is performed (N of step 044IWS1127B, see step 044IWS1129B).

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (D), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, Step N44 IWS1127B N).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-51 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (Step S112A) in the second modification. In FIG. 10-51, the processing of steps 044IWS1120A to S1126A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the process of step 044IWS1127C.

  In the second modification, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the change display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-51, the process of step 044IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

  FIG. 10-52 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the second modification. 10-52, the processes of steps 044IWS1120B to S1126B are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 10-22. However, in the second modification, the processes of steps 044IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the process of step 044IWS1127D.

  In the second modification, if the change display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 10-52, the process of step 044IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

  FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram for describing the control of the variable display when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the variable display of the other special symbol in the second modification.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the first special symbol a big hit variation that becomes a probable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (A), the change display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hitting game, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. When the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120A, Step 044 IWS1127C Y).

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the change display of the second special symbol during the change display of the first special symbol which is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost symbol (see N of Step 044IWS1127C, Step 044IWS1129A).

  If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which becomes a big hit, is the variation display of the second special symbol a big hit variation which becomes a probable big hit? Regardless of the big hit change which usually becomes a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (C), the change display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hitting game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 044IWS1120B, Step 044 IWS1127D Y).

  On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (D), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with a lost symbol (see N of Step 044IWS1127D, Step 044IWS1129B).

  As a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed, for example, other than the method shown in the first and second modifications, When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the forcible release is stopped, while the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

  Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes the 10R probability variation big hit, the forced off stop is performed, while the 2R probability variation big hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

  Also, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is lost, It may be configured to stop the forcible disconnection regardless of the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation. With such a configuration, in this example, if the fluctuating display is completed 50 times in the low probability / high base state, the display shifts to the low probability / low base state (see FIG. 10-29). When the variable display is terminated and the state is shifted to the low probability / low base state, 1 to 4 second hold memories are accumulated, and if there is a second hold memory which becomes a big hit, the forced off is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. In particular, in a gaming machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in the present example, by performing a right-hand operation in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the second starting winning opening that is easy to start winning is provided. It is also possible to perform a capture method in which the first winning prize opening is changed to the first special winning symbol and the first special symbol is changed while the first special winning symbol is changed and the second special symbol is changed and displayed. It is effective as a preventive measure of the method.

  As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being performed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, in the characteristic portion 044IW, a control for forcibly displaying the unsuccessful symbols is performed by the same control in the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of performing the variable display of the second special symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 10-47) has been described, different control may be performed. FIG. 10-54 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the third modification. In the third modification, the first special symbol change process is the same as the process shown in FIGS. 10-19. In FIG. 10-54, the processing of steps 0444IWS1120B to S1125B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22. not exist. Accordingly, in the third modification, if the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 044IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

  FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for describing the control of the variable display in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol during the variable display of one special symbol in the third modification.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-55 (A) and (C), in the third modification, during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a loss, a small hit, and a certain variation big hit, the small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-47 (A) and (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (D) and (F), during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a loss, a small hit, and a large variation, the small hit symbol is stopped in the variation display of the first special symbol. When displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-47 (D) and (F).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B), in the third modification, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which usually becomes a big hit. As in FIG. 10-47 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (E), in the third modification, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In contrast to FIG. 10-47 (E), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-55, in the third modification, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly performed with the missing symbol between the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. The control for stop display is different.

  In the third modification, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal big hit, the forcible stop is performed while the normal large hit is stopped. In the case where the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display is continued, but such a mode is limited. Absent. For example, conversely, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which normally becomes the big hit, the variation display is continued, When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to forcibly stop. Also, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol which becomes a big hit (regardless of whether the probability is a large jackpot or a normal jackpot), the forced off is performed. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol change display during the execution of the change display of the second special symbol which becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability change big hit or a normal big hit), The display may be continued. In such a case, the control for forcibly stopping the stoppage may be different between the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in some form.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-56 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the fourth modification. In FIG. 10-56, the processing of steps 044IWS1120A to S1128A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

  In the modified example 4, if the variation display of the first special symbol which is neither the 10R probability variable jackpot nor the 6R probability variable jackpot at step 044IWS1128A (that is, becomes the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed, the CPU 103 sets the probability variable flag to “0”. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 044 IWS1131A). If the probable change flag has not been set (that is, if it is not in the probable change state), the process ends. If the probable change flag is set (that is, if the probable change state is set), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129A). Note that the processing of step 044 IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

  In the fourth modification, the determination process of step 044IWS1131A is executed, and when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which usually becomes a big hit, The variation display of the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol when the certain variation state is being performed. On the other hand, even during the change display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, if not in the probable change state, the change display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 10-57 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol changing process in the fourth modification. In FIG. 10-57, the processing of steps 044IWS1120B to S1128B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

  In the modified example 4, when the variation display of the first special symbol which is not any of the 10R probability variable hit, the 6R probability variable hit, and the 2R probability variable hit is performed in step 044IWS1128B, the CPU 103 Checks whether the probable change flag is set or not (step 044IWS1131B). If the probable change flag has not been set (that is, if it is not in the probable change state), the process ends. If the probable change flag is set (that is, if the probable change state is set), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS1129B). Note that the processing of step 044 IWS1130B is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-22.

  In the fourth modification, by executing the determination process of step 044IWS1131B, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which usually becomes a big hit, The variation display of the second special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at the loss symbol when the certain variation state is being performed. On the other hand, even during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol which usually becomes a big hit, if the small change symbol is not in the probable change state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In the fourth modification, the case where the control for forcibly stopping the display in the off symbol is performed depending on whether or not the probable change flag is set (whether or not the probable change state is performed) is described. I can't. For example, it may be configured to perform a control of forcibly stopping and displaying a missing symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Further, for example, only when the high probability / low base state is set (the high probability flag is on and the high base flag is off), control for forcibly stopping and displaying a missing symbol may be performed. In this way, any configuration may be used as long as it is configured to perform a control of forcibly stopping and displaying a missing symbol according to the current game state in some form.

  In addition, as described above, when the control is performed such that the stop display is forcibly performed in the off symbol only in the high-probability / low-base state, it is possible to prevent a change in one of the identification information from becoming a normal big hit, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

  As described above, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) which is advantageous to the player. When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of (1), it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state) different from the advantageous state. In addition, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the one in which the first specific display result is derived and displayed, The advantage for the player is higher than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the state is controlled to be a positive change state after the end of the big hit game). In addition, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is not derived and displayed based on the derived display of the one identification information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted and the first special symbol or the second special (2) The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, during execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Is derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a lost symbol). Will be forcibly stopped). Therefore, control in consideration of the advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

  Specifically, in the case where a normal large hit (non-probable variable big hit) is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information despite the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the positive change state, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probable change state ends immediately, and there is a possibility that interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, if the unbalanced symbol is forcibly displayed (forced unaligned) uniformly in the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the one piece of identification information, even if the variable display is a large-variable hit, it is determined to be the forced disconnection. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) decreases, which is not preferable. Therefore, in the characteristic part 044IW, while the variable display that becomes a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit) is forcibly released, the fluctuation display for the positive variable big hit is changed by extending the fluctuation (interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time). In this way, it is possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing a decrease in the game value given to the player.

  In this example, as an aspect of “not stopping variable display of one identification information”, updating of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a case. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been interrupted after the small hit game, is restarted. May be. It is only necessary that the variable display is not completely stopped in some form.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) in a special state is easily provided. Therefore, by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable change) that is different from the advantageous state and is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). Also, based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the specific state is controlled (for example, control is performed after the big hit game based on the probable big hit is completed), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, control is performed in the non-specified state (for example, the control is not controlled to be in the certain change state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). Therefore, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not control is performed in a specific state.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable change) that is different from the advantageous state and is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). In addition, it is possible to control to a specific state based on a game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a specific area (for example, V area 044IW104) while being controlled to an advantageous state. Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See FIGS. 10-11). Therefore, control can be realized in consideration of whether the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

  Also, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, a special display result can be derived and displayed in any of the case where the variable display of the first identification information is performed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is performed ( 10-3 and 10-4). Further, during execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the first identification information is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information based on the first identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-55 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the second identification information, The control for deriving and displaying the variable display with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIG. 10-55 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable change) that is different from the advantageous state and is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)). The variable display execution means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information when controlled to the specific state, and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. During the execution of the above, the variable display of the one piece of identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other piece of identification information (FIG. 10-56, FIG. 10-). 57). Further, when the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result are being performed, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is entered based on the entry of the game medium (for example, the game ball) into the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening). ) Can be executed, and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is executed based on the game medium entering the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening). It is possible. Also, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can change between a first state (for example, an open state) in which game media can enter and a second state (for example, a closed state) in which game media is difficult or impossible to enter. Ball device 17). Further, after any one of the first identification information and the second identification information is variably displayed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player and a special state that has a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state ( (For example, a small hitting game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when being controlled to the special state. Further, the first start area is provided so that a game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, a left area of the game area) among the movement paths on which the game medium can move, can be entered, and the variable means includes A game medium moving on a specific route (for example, a right area of the game area) is provided so as to be able to enter. In addition, it is possible to execute specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 10-46 (1) and (2)) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific route, and variably display the first identification information. Is executed, the specific notification is not executed (for example, see FIG. 10-46 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

  Specifically, as shown in the feature part 044IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be performed. Is configured such that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than that of the small hit type on the second special symbol side. In the case where the variable display of the symbols is forcibly stopped and stopped, if the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol having a low winning ratio (advantage), substantially, Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player will waste the game ball, and rather will be notified of an unfavorable firing promotion, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, while the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, the right hit notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's useless beating, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

  Also, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, the information relating to the variable display of the first identification information can be stored as the temporary storage, the first storage means (for example, the first storage buffer), and the variable display of the second identification information. And a second hold storage unit (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the hold as a hold storage. In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information, the state becomes an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information, the special state (for example, (Small hitting game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result at a high frequency. In addition, when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are performed in parallel, based on the special display result being derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved storage can be smoothly consumed.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to provide a predetermined value when controlled to a special state (for example, to pay out 10 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening), When controlled to be in an advantageous state, a value higher than a predetermined value can be given (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on a prize of a game ball to a special winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-46 (1) and (2)) and a visual recognition more than the first specific notification. It is possible to execute highly specific second specific notification (for example, display of right-handed display 044IW007 shown in FIG. 10-46 (1)). When controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 10-46 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the state is controlled to the special state. In this case, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 10-46 (2)). Therefore, notification corresponding to the value that can be given can be realized.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed, it is more advantageous than when the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed. It is controlled to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). When the display is controlled to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-46 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the advantage of the player.

  Further, according to the present characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative symbol) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, a variable display effect in a common mode can be executed when the special state is controlled and when the special state is not controlled (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, , And the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored in the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

  Further, according to the present characteristic portion 044IW, a delay means (for example, a restriction piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided upstream of the variable means on the specific route. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a target from being hit against the timing at which the control to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is performed in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the strategy for capturing the game machine.

  The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a configuration is provided in which a passage member is provided on the upstream side of the variable prize ball device 6B and the special variable prize ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, as a delay means, for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right. May be.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, an effect is produced based on information from the game control means (for example, the microcomputer 100 for game control (specifically, the CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game, and information from the game control means. Effect control means for controlling (for example, effect control CPU 120). Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) for performing the predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes specific notification (for example, lighting of right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, appropriate notification can be realized while reducing the processing load on the effect control means.

  In the present example, the right strike notification is executed during the big hit game regardless of whether the first special symbol change display is executed or the second special symbol change display is executed. Although a case is shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a special variable prize ball device (right large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable prize ball device (right large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the gaming area. When the big change is displayed in the symbol change display, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and when the big special change is displayed in the big special game, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. In the case of applying to the gaming machine configured as described above, if a large hit is made in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case of a big hit, a right strike notification may not be executed during the big hit game. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the left hit notification may be executed during the big hit game when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right large winning opening) is controlled to the advantageous state of the type of the control target. With such a configuration, in the event of a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, by executing a left hit notification during the big hit game, it is possible to suppress a player from erroneously performing a right hit operation. And the disadvantage of the player can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (the second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where the right strike notification is executed even during the KT state has been described. The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, when the second start winning port is applied to a gaming machine provided to the left of the gaming area, a right strike notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, and the time reduction state. Is also good.

  Further, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 044IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even in the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH), when the first variation display after the big hit game is executed, in addition to the lighting of the right-hand indicator 26 and the right-hand notification LED 37, The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display 044IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the big hit game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, the right-handed display 044IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. May be configured to execute the right strike notification.

  Further, in the present example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in the present example. For example, in addition to the right-handed display 044IW007 having a relatively large size as shown in FIG. 10-46 (1), a sign indicating right-handed display (for example, a rightward triangle display) is displayed on the image display device 5. May be configured to be able to execute right-handed notification.

  Further, the small hit control method is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning prize ball devices are provided, and a special variable winning prize ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is different depending on the type of the small hit, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display with a small hit. The selection rate of the small hit type may be different between the case where the small hit and the case where the small special hit is displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select a small hit type (or a small hit type in an open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hitting type opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls (or the small hitting type in an open mode having a high winning rate) is easily selected. May be configured.

  Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the change display of the second special symbol, a right strike notification is performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-46 (2)), and the change display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit has occurred, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-46 (3)), but a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, in the case where a small hit occurs due to the change display of the second special symbol being performed in a situation where the left hitting operation is to be performed in the normal state, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hitting game. May be.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable state) and a specific state (for example, a probable state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. (For example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for determining to derive and display. In addition, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common between the case where control is performed in the non-specific state and the case where control is performed in the specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10). -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

  Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability or the type distribution changes according to the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in payout performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling property may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the number of special determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is made common), thereby preventing the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. And prevent gambling from becoming excessively high.

  Further, according to the present characteristic part 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display state of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state, appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, the special state is divided into a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It can be controlled. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  In addition, according to the feature portion 044IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect corresponding to the advantage of the special state (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect illustrated in FIGS. 10 to 45). Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

  Also, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, the small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, it is possible to execute a setting value suggestion effect indicating the setting value (for example, the setting value suggestion effect illustrated in FIGS. 10-44). Therefore, by executing the set value suggestion effect, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

  In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the setting value suggestion effect are executed in the variation display that is out of the range is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or a setting value suggestion effect may be executed during a big hit game or a small hit game, and various modes are conceivable.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. The number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Specifically, in the characteristic part 044IW, the number of special type determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the small hit type is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value becomes excessive. This prevents the gambling from becoming too large and prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the assignment of the small hit type is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown, The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be made different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may differ depending on the set value.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, a 10R probability variable hit, a 6R probability variable hit, a 6R normal variable hit, a 2R probability variable hit, and a 2R normal variable hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the big hit type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Specifically, in the characteristic part 044IW, the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value by setting the number of the advantageous type determination values to be common regardless of the set value (commonly assigning the jackpot type). And prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the assignment of the big hit type is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown, It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be made different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may differ depending on the set value.

  Further, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the fluctuation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate gaming properties can be realized.

  Specifically, in the characteristic portion 044IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is made common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is made common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively changed depending on the set value. This prevents the gambling from becoming too large and prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control changes, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in elements other than the big hit lottery. Although the degree (difference in ball performance) greatly differs, which is not preferable, in the present characteristic portion 044IW, such a problem is prevented by making the selection ratio of the variation pattern common regardless of the set value. ing.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 10, the case where the allocation of the variation patterns is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, by changing the determination ratio of the variation pattern depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency is varied depending on the set value. You may comprise so that a difference may arise in an advantage according to a value.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is determined as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for a loss determination). In addition, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. The number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination values are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs according to the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable state) and a specific state (for example, a probable state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

  Further, according to the characteristic portion 044IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). This can be performed in parallel with the variable display.) Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the setting value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

  In addition, according to the present characteristic unit 044IW, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of the special display result is increased. Also, when a variable display is performed in which the display is controlled to the special state and a predetermined display result (for example, a lost symbol) is derived and displayed, a set value suggestion effect indicating the set value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-44). Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, by executing the set value suggestion effect, it is possible to improve interest in the game.

  In addition, according to the feature part 044IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. In addition, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for a jackpot determination) for determining that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. (For example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for determining to derive and display. In addition, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. In addition, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game characteristics.

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of identification information with a predetermined display result (forcible stoppage), the display result of the variable display is advantageous. The control considering the degree could not be realized. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the variable display result, the characteristic unit 044IW has the following gaming machines (means A1) to (means A6). Is also disclosed.

(Means A1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing games, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps S122 to S125) and a special display result (for example, a variable display result). When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) ), The variable display execution means executes the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information while performing the variable display of the other identification information. On the basis of the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display, the first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, when the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is updated). And the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed) and the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, The second control (for example, displaying a lost symbol and stopping it (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the lost symbol)) derived and displayed in the shifted symbol) And which of the first control and the second control is executed depends on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, The CPU 103 executes the steps 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of the steps 044IWS1128A and S1128B. In step 044 IWS1127A and S1127B, Therefore, steps 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Steps 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of Steps 044IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

(Means A2) In the means A1, a special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion that executes step 044 IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). Specific state control means (for example, a different state, which can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable change state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state compared to a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 044 IWS2206 in the CPU 103), and the specific state control means controls to the specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed. (For example, the state is controlled to be in the changed state after the big hit game based on the changed jackpot). Controlled to a constant state (e.g., after the jackpot gaming based on normal big hit ends not control the probability variation state) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to A3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and is controllable to a specific state (for example, a high-probability state (probable state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low-probability state) Control means (for example, a portion for executing step 044 IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), and the specific state control means controls the specific area (for example, Based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through the V region 044IW104), it can be controlled to a specific state (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103 executes steps 044IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, and when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. The game medium passes through the specific area at a high rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state as compared with (in the big hit game based on the probable variable big hit, as shown in FIG. The opening period of the 044IW101 is long, while the opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 may be very short in a big hit game based on a normal big hit, as shown in FIG. . According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to A4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the state is controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game). The variable display execution means can derive and display the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is performed or the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, game control). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Steps 044IWS64A and S64B (refer to FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). During execution of the variable display corresponding to the specific display result, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed based on the predetermined display result based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, In the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Steps 044IWS1129A and S1130A when N at Step 044IWS1128A. See FIG. 10-55 (B)), the second identification. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display of the information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the second identification information is predetermined. The control for deriving and displaying the display result is not performed (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, , CPU 103) does not perform the processing of step 044IWS1126B～S1128B. Figure 10-54, Figure 10-55 (E) see.) It may be configured so. According to such a configuration, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means A6) In any one of the means A1 to A5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the state is controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) Means (for example, a portion for executing step 044 IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), and the variable display execution means controls to a specific state. When the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being performed, the variable display of the other identification information is being performed. , The variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103 ) Executes steps 044IWS1129A and S1130A when Y is determined in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B. Refer to FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57.) When the non-specific state is controlled, the first identification information and the second During execution of the variable display of one of the identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the other identification information is displayed. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 ( More specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to Steps 044IWS1129A and S1129B when N is determined in Steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B, and may be configured as shown in FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148127), regarding the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of identification information with a predetermined display result (forcible stoppage), the display result of the variable display is advantageous. The control considering the degree could not be realized. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the variable display result, the characteristic unit 044IW has the following gaming machines (means B1) to (means B6). Is also disclosed.

(Means B1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and includes a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). Variable display executing means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol (design) in parallel with the display of the variable display. As a result, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, the advantageous state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, the CPU 103) performs steps S122 to S125) and a special display result (for example, a variable display result). When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) ), The variable display execution unit performs variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. The special display result can be derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 044IWS64A and S64B; see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). During execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special table is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived display of the result, the first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted and the first control is stopped) The second control (for example, a missing symbol) is derived and displayed based on a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) and the variable display of the one of the identification information is continuously displayed. (For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol), and the display is derived in the variable display of one of the identification information. Which of the first control and the second control is executed depends on the displayed result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes step 044). Steps 044 IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed based on the determination results of IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Steps 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of Steps 044IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes Steps 044IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of Steps 044IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

(Means B2) In the means B1, the special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion that executes step 044 IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given in the special state.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). Specific state control means (for example, a different state, which can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable change state)) that is easily controlled to an advantageous state compared to a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 044 IWS2206 in the CPU 103), and the specific state control means controls to the specific state based on the first specific display result being derived and displayed. (For example, the state is controlled to be in the changed state after the big hit game based on the changed jackpot). Controlled to a constant state (e.g., after the jackpot gaming based on normal big hit ends not control the probability variation state) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not control is performed to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any one of the means B1 to B3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and is controllable to a specific state (for example, a high-probability state (probable state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low-probability state) Control means (for example, a portion for executing step 044 IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), and the specific state control means controls the specific area (for example, Based on the fact that a game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through the V region 044IW104), it can be controlled to a specific state (for example, for game control). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103 executes steps 044IWS2404, S2405, S2204 to S2206), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, and when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. The game medium passes through the specific area at a high rate when controlled to be in an advantageous state as compared with (in the big hit game based on the probable variable big hit, as shown in FIG. The opening period of the 044IW101 is long, while the opening period of the V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 may be very short in a big hit game based on a normal big hit, as shown in FIG. . According to such a configuration, control can be realized in consideration of whether the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any one of the means B1 to B4, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probable variable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the state is controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game). The variable display executing means is configured to derive and display the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. , The variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed based on the predetermined display result (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs step 044IWS1). If N in 28A, steps 044IWS1129A and S1130A are executed. See FIG. 10-55 (B).) During the execution of the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second specific display result, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the second identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the third modification, the game control microcomputer is used). 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 044IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-54 and 10-55 (E).). According to such a configuration, in addition to the advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether the display is the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means B6) In any one of the means B1 to B5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probable big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the state is controlled to be in a stable state after the end of the big hit game). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probable state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) Means (for example, a portion for executing step 044 IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), and the variable display execution means controls to a specific state. When the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being performed, the variable display of the other identification information is being performed. , The variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103 ) Executes steps 044IWS1129A and S1130A when Y is determined in steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B. Refer to FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57.) When the non-specific state is controlled, the first identification information and the second During execution of the variable display of one of the identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the other identification information is displayed. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the fourth modification, the game control microcomputer 100 ( More specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to Steps 044IWS1129A and S1129B when N is determined in Steps 044IWS1131A and S1131B, and may be configured as shown in FIGS. 10-56 and 10-57. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, control can be realized in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

  Note that the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 044IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the characteristic portion 21TM can be changed is applied to the present feature portion 044IW, so that the set value suggestion effect can be executed, or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. Alternatively, it may be configured such that right-handed notification can be executed. Also, for example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the characteristic portion 21TM can be changed is applied to the characteristic portion 044IW, and a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of the other special symbol is being performed. In such a case, the variable display of the one special symbol may be forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, or the variable display may be continued.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special design display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
Reference Signs List 10 General winning opening 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 13 Voice control board 14 LED control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning ball device 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23… First count switch 24… Second count switch 30… Hitting operation handle 31A… Stick controller 31B… Push button 32… Movable body 41… Pass gate 100… Game control microcomputers 101, 121… ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124: random number circuit 105, 125: I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 ... display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
Variable display executing means capable of executing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information in parallel;
When the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, advantageous state control means capable of controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to the player;
Special state control means that can be controlled to a special state different from the advantageous state when the special display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display,
The specific display result includes a first specific display result and a second specific display result,
When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the advantage for the player is higher than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed,
The variable display execution means,
While the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result is being executed, the special display result is being displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived display, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed,
The variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display of the other identification information during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result. A gaming machine characterized in that a variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result based on the derived display of the one.

Images